TECHNICAL CATALOGUE www.elkoep.com Presentation of ELKO EP Company ELKO EP, which is based in Holešov, has been with you on the electrical market for the past 20 years, covering a wide range of domestic equipments in the field of electrical installations. In the last few years there has been dynamic development of smart wiring, in which our company has been seven years developing and launching iNELS smart home system solutions. In modular devices, as well as in smart wiring, we have become market leaders. We‘re developing products that bring comfort to customers and safety for the environment. The Parent ELKO EP company has gradually grown in 7 branches - Slovakia, Hungary, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, Romania and most recently Germany. At the same time we export to 60 countries around the world, and our products can be found under the world famous brand names (Schneider Electric, Eaton, HAGER, Siemens, MORS SMITT). Our work is based on the development and modern technology. In practice, we appreciate you as our customers, because you‘re receiving good products and smart solutions, which meet your requirements. Our development facilities and precise production and distribution, all this gives you the opportunity to use solutions which are both innovative and practical. There are our modern manufacturing facilities to produce all our products. It was extended over the newest and fastest SMD line, which means for you guaranteed quality and flexibility of supply. We have and supervise 80% share of the Czech market and the fourth position in Europe. Current-year sales growth: 20% Number of employees in Holešov: 170 Number of employees of ELKO EP Holding: 236 Awards and Recognition: In 2011, the experts awarded the top products developed in ELKO EP: RF Touch - wireless touch control unit won a Golden Amper, Moravian Electrical and Electronic Association Award, Innovation Award of the year and PwC Special Award for Innovation. Also iNELS Multimedia - Multimedia control through television, won an award - honorable mention Grand Prix. Providing the possibility for students in technical fields to do their thesis. In 2012, the company ELKO EP became THE Number ONE company in Zlín Region and in the national finals, we won second place. Our range of products is divided into three product lines - relay (classical modular devices), RF Control (wireless), iNELS BUS system (Bus System). Each product line has its own technical catalogue, where you can find complete information on individual products. Product Lines RELAYS - Modular electronic devices www.elkoep.com A wide range of electronic modular devices, which bring new possibilities to home and office control, monitoring and security, as well as to industrial process control: time relays, installation contactors, staircase automatic switches, time switches clocks, dimmers, thermostats, power supplies units, control and signalling devices, GSM gates, etc. www.inels.com iNELS - Intelligent electro-installation System iNELS will transform your house into a timeless intelligent household. It will take charge of heating and air-conditioning regulation, lighting control and home appliance switching, while also providing perfect security for your home. Enjoy controlling your entire house via a TV screen thanks to iNELS Multimedia (iMM) or use the elegant iNELS Touch Panel (iTP). www.elkoep.com iNELS RF Control - Wireless control A unique wireless control system providing you perfect control over your home! The RF Control system enables you to control functions such as heating, lighting, electrical appliances and window shutters, all with a single touch. No wall cutting, fast and easy installation, exclusive design of wireless wall switch buttons and other components. LOGUS90 – Home switches and sockets www.logus90.com We offer you exclusive switches, sockets and accessories in a standard plastic or metallic design. However, there are also charming luxury frames from purely natural materials such as genuine wood, metal, granite or hardened glass. Be especial! 2 iNELS system advantages Advantages to classical electrical installation: Comfort - dimming function (gradual dim-up/dim-down, soft start, light scenes) - control via touch-screen (built-in a wall) = complete information - control via any remote controller (e.g. of your TV or stereo) - control by voice (Sophy unit, listens to your voice commands) - temperature regulation according to pre-set programs – in each room individually - possibility to control by mobile phone, computer and Internet Automatization - function is executed automatically on the basis of set value (time, temperature, light intensity, movement of people, wind strength...) - it is possible to execute several functions on the basis of one command or event (e.g. when it is dark - INELS rolls shutters down, switches lights on, increases room temperature and switches TV on, and many others ...) - arrival/departure functions: after a code is entered (or a card read) to a keyboard, system automatically sets electrical appliances according to the identifi ed user. Information - system informs you about selected event/events by SMS text message - anywhere you are and if you have an access to Internet, you can connect to your house and supervise or change its state - integrated security system can be connected to a security agency Security - alarm with extended functions is a part of the system - system is equipped by a keyboard which can be controlled by a code or by an access card - all settings and accesses are subjects of passwords in several levels - protection of a house in case of bad weather (shutters in strong winds or storm), unexpected events (irregularities in power supply, overload), natural disasters (sensor for flooding, smoke sensor) - bio-installation: deconnection of unused electric circuit (e.g. socket outlets in bedroom while sleeping) - setting ideal conditions for your children’s sleep (gradual dimming off , pleasant temperature, motion monitoring = baby-sitting) - touchable parts of sensors are supplied by a safe voltage 24V DC Savings - regulation of heating / cooling - time or time-limited switching - light regulation (possible energy savings up to 10% ) - dependant switching (e.g. when it is dark, for desired temperature etc...) - blocking of selected appliances in case of high meter readings - elimination of unwillingly switched appliances (e.g. when there is no motion – light switches off ) Design - modern design of the switches and sockets, thermostat, voice activity detectors – optional designes of Elegant or LOGUS90 - variety to combine diff erent colours also in multiframe versions - touch panel screen – unique solution of elegant wireless home automation Time for installation - considerably lower thanks to bus installation (only 2 control wires) - units are installed and later programmed Flexibility of changes and extensions - in future it is possible to add or change units easily - functions can be changed by PC, also remotely through Internet Available features for disabled people - voice and remote control - sound messages for blind (unit Sophy speaks pre-recorded messages) - several actions can be done by one command - control by computer from one spot Choose the right one! PRICE OF INSTALLATION Control using the TV Tablet / SmartPhone PC / Laptop Music playback Video cameras Weather station Door communicator Controlling home appliances Touch panel Control via GSM telephone Detectors Group controller Heating regulation Controlling blinds Dimming lights Controlling appliances - Classic electro -installation Electricity is a necessary companion to our everyday life and follows us almost wherever we go. Not only does it provide us with light or a means of cooking, but it also gets us around from point A to point B. Everybody knows where to find the home electric control panel and what to do when the power goes out. We make all the devices that go into such control panels and switchboards, and have been selling them for almost 20 years. Our assortment includes all modular electronic devices (time relays, installation contactors, staircase switches, timers, dimmers, thermostats, power sources, control and signaling devices). Thanks to experience, we stand on solid foundations, and we are responsibly developing wide-ranging additions in the form of higher levels of electrical installations - either wireless or intelligent (bus-based). Energy savings: Controlling appliances Dimming lights Controlling blinds Heating regulation Controlling household appliances Door communicator Weather station Video cameras (outdoor/indoor) Group controller Detectors Control via GSM telephone Touch panel Audio Zone PC/Laptop Tablet SmartPhone (controlling via TV) (music playback) Video Zone Choose the right one! PRICE OF INSTALLATION Control using the TV - Wireless electrical installations Tablet PC / Laptop Music playback - Video cameras - Weather station - Door communicator - Controlling home appliances - Touch panel Control via Smartphone Detectors Wireless switch Most of you have already built a house or furnished an apartment. If you want to bring life into your home, we have an elegant wireless solution. As the name implies, the wireless communication is working with a range of up to 200 m (it depends on the internal structure of the house/apartment, and the used building materials. The central brain is in this case the touch RF Touch unit, which can be placed anywhere within the range. It‘s possible not only to program entire system from this unit, but also to control it. Brightly replaces several thermostats and controllers. Within the system, you have an unlimited opportunity to add any drivers and placing them at the suitable places. Heating regulation Controlling blinds Energy savings: Dimming lights Controlling appliances Controlli Contro lling ng appliances Dimming Dimmin Dim ming g lights Controlli Contro lling ng blinds Heatin Hea ting g regulation Controlling household appl pp iances Door communicator Weather station Video cameras PRICE OF INSTALLATIONONE (outdoor/indoor) Wireless Wirele ss switch Detect Det ectors ors Contro Con C ttroll via viia Smartphone Audio Zone PC /Laptop Tablet Touch Touch panel Video Zone (controlling via TV) (music playback) Bus electrical installations Control using the TV Tablet Are you building a new home? Then you should consider a bus-based solution. A bus in this sense is a data conductor that is distributed in the walls across the entire home. As opposed to a wireless solution, its advantage is range, because up to 6 x 550 m buses can be distributed in a single building. PC / Laptop Music playback Video cameras Weather station Door communicator Controlling home appliances Touch panel Control via smartphone Detectors Connection to a computer expands the scope of its available functions. This system may be expanded to include multimedia extensions and can connect third party devices (household appliances, A/C, etc.). Control and monitoring the system can be performed via PC, the Internet, telephone, tablet, etc. The system offers a wider range of functions that can be applied. A computer is used to set the parameters. Group controller Heating regulation Controlling blinds Energy savings: Dimming lights Controlling appliances Controlli Contro lling ng appliances Stmívání Dimming osvětlení lights Controlli Contro lling ng blinds Regulace Heating regulation vytápění Controlli Contro lling ng hou housese hold appliances Doorr Doo communicator Weatherr Weathe station Video Vid eo cam camera erass (outdoor/indoor) Group Gro up controller Detectors Detektory Contro Con C troll via viia Smartphone Audio Aud io Zon Zone e PC /Lap Laptop top Tablet Tab let (music playback) Dotykový Touch panel Video Vid eo Zon Zone e (controlling via TV) iNELS smart home solutions 10 reasons to choose bus system 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Ideal solution for new buildings Two-wire bus Bus once stretched you can always expand Security system, combined with detectors Remote control (PC, mobile phone applications) Imitation of presence Regulation depending on the weather Ecology and energy saving Modern trends in controling Media under control (can also be controlled via TV) 10 reasons to choose wireless system 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Do you know that heating regulations save up to 30% from the energy costs Without any reconstruction work The fast duration for electrical installations‘s implementation Convenient and affordable prices for everyone The possibility of upgrading your system - gradually upgrade your installations Battery - powered transmitters - no electrical injury The variability of the features that you can change The design, which inspires you Professional assembly and service of our partners We are the Czech company, which top priority is customer‘s satisfaction House switches and sockets BASE AQUARELLA ANIMATO CRYSTAL METALLO ARBORE PETRA Plastic Metallic design Plastic Crystal Metal Wood Stone Design ranges BASE – Simplicity is the sign of beauty. Precise and convenient shapes, distinctive colours embodied in switches. BR - White GE - Ice DG - Green/Ice CG - Crystal/Ice TP - Titanium/Pearl FP - Beech Wood/Pearl GG - Granite/Ice AQUARELLA – Spacetime without limits. Metallic design will draw you into the world of exclusive design. Animato – Wide range of colors, modern design and nice price. MF - Ivory PE - Pearl ZG - Blue/Ice CP - CRYSTAL/Pearl IA - Inox/Aluminium JP - Cherry Tree/Pearl GP - Granite/Pearl CRYSTAL – Endless elegance of glass. Switches underlining the dynamics of your interior. METALLO – Be exceptional! Nobility of metal will inspire you with unforgettable moments. AL - Aluminium JG - Orange/Ice CA - Crystal/Aluminium OP - Gold/Pearl MS - Mahogany/Grey GA - Granite/Aluminium ARBORE – The Nature at your fingertips. Warm tones of wood create an atmosphere of absolute bliss. PETRA – Feel free to experiment. Stone is a symbol IS - Grey VG - Red/Ice CS - Crystal/Grey QS - Nickel/Grey NA - Walnut Tree/Aluminium GS - Granite/Grey of stability, strength and power. Enjoy the switches you can lean on. www.logus90.com Catalogue content Modular electronic devices Time relays Time relays review Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO Doublestage delay unit SJR-2 Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H Multifunction time relays CRM-61 CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE - with external potentiometer PLUG-IN - PRM-91H/11, PRM-91H/8, PRM-92H, PRM-2H Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B Digital time switch SHT Timer with an astronomical program SHT-4 Time switch SHT-6 with DCF managing DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77 Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B Staircase switch CRM-4 Staircase switch CRM-42 with signalling before switching off, CRM-42F Power and auxiliary relays Power and auxiliary relays review Modular VS116K, VS308K, VS316/24,VS316/230, VS116U, VS308U Plug-in 782L,750L Dimmers Overview of dimmers Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2 Controlled dimmer DIM-5 DIM-14 DIM-6 DIM-6-3M-P DIM-15, SMR-M SMR-S, SMR-U LIC-1 Power supplies Power supplies review Line DR Line PS Power supplies ZSR-30, ZNP-10 Bell transformer ZTR Other modular devices Twilight switch SOU-1 Twilight switch with digital time switch SOU-2 innovation! Twilight and light switch SOU-3 Memory relay MR-41, MR-42 Controlling and signalling units USS Monitoring relays Monitoring relays review HRN-41/42 HRN-3x, HRN-6x Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N Relay for monitoring over/undervoltage and phase failure HRN-57, HRN-57N Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56 (120, 208, 240, 400, 480, 575) Relay monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1 8–9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16–17 18 19 20–21 22 23 24 25 26–27 28 29 31 32–33 34–35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42–43 44 45 46–47 48–49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59–60 61 62–63 64 65 66 67 68–69 70 Modular electronic devices Monitoring relays Monitoring current relays PRI-32 PRI-51 PRI-52 PRI-53 PRI-41, PRI-42 Current transformer SR for monitoring current relays PRI (accessories) Level monitoring level Level monitoring relays HRH-1 Level monitoring relays HRH-5 Level monitoring relays HRH-4 Level monitoring relays HRH-6 Level sensors to level switches SHR-1M, SHR-1N, SHR-2, SHR-3 (accessories) Relay monitoring COS-1 HRF-10 Thermostats Thermostats review Analog and digital thermostats Modular thermostat TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H) Modular thermostat TER-3 (E, F) Modular 2-stage thermostat TER-4 Modular thermostat for controlling temperature of motor winding TER-7 Modular multifunction digital thermostat TER-9 Thermo - ATR, ATF, ATC Thermo - DTR, DTF, DTC Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1 Single-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-2, TEV-3 Two-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-1 Outdoor thermostat TEV-4 Humidistat RHT-1 Outdoor humidistat RHV-1 Accessories Thermal sensors to thermostats TC, TZ, PT-100 Installation contactors Installation contactors review Installation contactors and installation contactors with manual control VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463 VSM220, VSM425 Loadability of installation contactors EAN codes Technical information Main instructions (for correct use of products) Product loadability Electromagnetic compatibility of products EMC chart Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads Products packing Dimensions Examples of usage Support of project design Production technology 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78–79 80–81 82 83 84 85 86–87 88 89 90 91 92–93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104–105 106 107 108 109 110 111–112 113 114 115 116 117–121 122–129 133 134–135 Time relays Single-function CRM-81J CRM-83J 3 functions and 6 time ranges, multivoltage or 230V supply, output 16A changeover/SPDT. as CRM-81J but with 3x8A changeover output/SPDT. CRM-82TO “true OFF” relay - delay off without supply, for back-up circuits. SJR-2 two-state delay unit (2x delay on), gradual switching of high loads. CRM-2T CRM-2H CRM-2HE delay start-up of motors star/delta. asymmetric cycler, independent time setting ON/OFF. as CRM-2H , but time setting by external potentiometers (for frequent setting). Potentiometer Multifunction Analog CRM-91H CRM-93H CRM-9S CRM-61 CRM-91HE 10 functions, 10 time ranges, 1x output 16A changeover/ SPDT, multivoltage or 230V supply. as CRM-91 but output 3x8A chageover/SPDT. as CRM-91 but contactless output (triac 0.7A). cost effective version of CRM-91H, 6 functions, 6 time ranges. Output 8A changeover/SPDT, supply AC 24-240 V, DC 24V . as CRM-91H but with time setting by external potentiometer (for frequent setting). potentiometer - external control unit for CRM-91HE and CRM-2HE, mounting into a switchboard, max connection length 10 m. Digital PDR-2A 4 digit display, 16 functions, 2 independent times 0.01s-100 hrs 2 outputs 16A changeover/SPDT START/STOP inputs. PDR-2B SHT-1, SHT-1/2 as PDR-2A but 10 functions for each output and time meaning two relays in one device. SHT1: time switch with daily, weekly programming. 1-channel, output 16 A changeover/SPDT. SHT1/2: as SHT-1, but 2-channel. SHT-3, SHT-3/2 SHT-4 as SHT-1 but with daily, weekly, monthly, and annual programming up to 2095. SHT3/2: as SHT-3, but 2-channel. Timer with an astronomical program to control the lighting without using a light sensor. 2-channel. PRM-2H socket to DIN rail PLUG-IN PRM-91H/11 as CRM-91H but into 11-pin socket, multivoltage supply, output contact 16 A. PRM-91H/8 as PRM-91H/11 but with 8-pin socket, output contact 16A. PRM-92H as PRM-91H but with 2x changeover/SPDT 8A contacts, into 11-pin socket. as CRM-2H but with 11-pin socket, 2x changeover, 8A contact. MINI Staircase switch SMR-K SMR-T SMR-H super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral). Input: can be connected in parallel with LED energy saving light bulb or fluorescent lamp. super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral). as SMR-T but 4 wire connection, output - triac 0-200 VA, 9 functions including function of memory relay. CRM-4 basic version , time 0.5-10 min output contact 16 A , anti-blocking function. 8 CRM-42 programmable staircase switch with warning before switching off, time setting by number of button pressings. CRM-42F programmable staircase switch without warning before switching off, time setting by number of button pressings. SMR-B as SMR-H but output relay contact 16 A (possibility to switch also fluorescent lights). DIM-2 with dimming, setting: dim-up/shining/dim-down brightness only for el. bulbs output up to 500VA. ES-11 (11 pin) ES-8 (8 pin). SHT-6 Time switch with DCF managing. Daily, weekly and annual program, output 16 A. 1-channel. Chart 1. Version - DIN rail mounting Functions SMR-B SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H CRM-81J/ZR CRM-81J/ZN CRM-81J/BL CRM-83J/ZR CRM-83J/ZN CRM-83J/BL CRM-82TO CRM-91H CRM-93H CRM-91HE CRM-2HE CRM-9S CRM-2H CRM-2T/230 CRM-4 CRM-42(CRM-42F) CRM-61 SJR-2 PDR-2/A PDR-2/B SHT-1 (SHT-1/2) SHT-3 (3/2), SHT-6 SHT-4 SOU-2 PRM-91H PRM-92H PRM-2H See chart 2 Version - mounting into installation box (KU68) A -delay off on entering edge B - delay off on downward edge C - delay off on downward edge D - cycler - flasher by impuls E - puls shift F - delay on G - pulse relay H - impulse relay with delay I - cycler starting with gap j - delay on after switched off 0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h 1 - 10 h 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days Number of Supply voltage contacts 1-MODULE 2-MODULE 3-MODULE PLUG-IN Under the switch Rotary switch Button Sliding switch External potentiometer Delay OFF after switch off the Input supply Delay ON Delay OFF Symmetrical cycler starting with delay Delay OFF after impulse OFF Symmetrical cycler starting with impulse Staircase switch Impulse shift Memory (impulse) relay Impulse generator Delay ON at switch on controlling contact Asymmetric cycler starting with delay Asymmetric cycler starting with impulse Delay ON star / delta Switching in real time Impuls relay in delay ON 0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 hrs 1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days 3 - 30 days 10 - 100 days 30 s - 10 min 99 h 59 min 59 s Day Week Month Year 230 V AC 12 - 240 V AC/DC 12 - 240 V AC 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A 2x changeover 8 A 2x changeover 16 A 3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A Static output (triac) 1x NO 16 A Type AC 230 V 1x triac 1x NO AgSnO2 ( ) ( ) OUTPUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE TIME FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING Type Chart 2. Version - mounting into installation box (KU68) 9 Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Single-function and single-time relay with possibility of fine time setting by a potentiometer (within the frames of a particular time range) Suitable for applications where function and time requirements are known Time switch, possible to be used for pump decay time after switching heating off, switching of fans Choice of 3 functions: 1) ZR - Delay ON 2) ZN -Delay OFF 3) BL - Repeat Cycle Functions can be controlled by supply voltage or time scale control input.: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 6 s - 60 s / 1 min - 10 min / 6 min - 60 min / 1 h - 10 hrs) Universal voltage range AC/DC 12 - 240 V Output contact: CRM-81J: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A CRM-83J: 3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A Red LED output indicator 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code CRM-81J by type CRM-83J by type Technical parameters UNI 230 Functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Consumption (apparent/loss): Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Control Consumption of input: Load between S-A2: Control terminals: Glow tubes connetions: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Power of control input: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Operating position: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size(mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: CRM-81J CRM-83J ZR - delay ON / ZN - delay OFF/ BL- cycler 1:1 A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 h (in 6 alternate) potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01% / 0C, at =20 0C Symbol Connection CRM-81J Un 16 A1 18 A1 AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V) Yes (UNI), Yes (AC 230 V) A1-S Yes UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO 230 V - max.10 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230 AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms 26 15 A2 S A2 15 36 25 Un - + 38 - + S A2 A1 S A2 35 25 26 28 16 + 15 16 18 18 15 16 18 A1 Un S A2 15 Example of an order CRM-81J/230, ZR10s 1x changeover contact, voltage AC 230 V, function: delay ON, time 1 - 10 s CRM-83J/UNI, BL1h 3x changeover contact, voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V, function: cycler begin with impulse, time 6 - 60 min Functions ZR - Delay ON BL - Cycler 1:1 ZN - Delay OFF Note: the function ZR and ZN is controlled by supply voltage and control input ie. when it comes to failure and refreshing the supply voltage, the relay automatically makes one cycle. Time range 10 s 1 min 10 min 1 hr 10 hrs min 0.1 s 1s 6s 1 min 6 min 1 hr max 1s 10 s 60 s 10 min 60 min 10 hrs Description Supply terminals A1 S A2 Control input “S” Output indication Supply indication Time setting EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 15 10 28 35 36 38 S 1s -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals any III. 2 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (UNI) - 86 g, (230) - 82 g (UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g 18 A1 load 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 8 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 10 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 16 16 18 Output contact Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO ! „True OFF“ relay - relay timing without supply voltage ! Sample of use: back-up source for Delay OFF in case of voltage failure (e.g. emergency lighting, emergency respirator, or protection of el. controlled doors - in case of fire) ! 2 time functions adjustable by rotary switch: a - Delayed return after disconnecting of supply e - Delayed start ! Time range (adjustable by rotary switch and fine setting by potentiometer): 0.1 s - 10 min ! Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V ! Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A ! Output status indicated by red LED (only in case of supply voltage connection) ! Clamp terminals ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code CRM-82TO /UNI: 8595188137614 Symbol Technical parameters CRM-82TO Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Operating position: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): a - On Delay (Power On)/ e - Off Delay (S Break) A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 min potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 2x changeover/SPDT (AgNi/ Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC 10 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 Connection Un A1 A2 16 18 26 15 28 A1 A2 16 26 18 28 15 25 25 Description Supply terminals A1 Output contact A2 16 26 Output indication CRM- 82TO Supply indication -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals any III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 ( AWG 12 ) with sleeve max. 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 ( AWG 12 ) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 93 g (3.3 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Rough time setting Fine time setting FUNC e 28 18 15 25 Function setting a Output contact Output contact Function a - Delay OFF (S break) the power supply is switched off (min. time is 0.5 s) e - Off Delay (S break) U t U t t 11 Doublestage delay unit SJR-2 ! For gradual switching of heavy powers (e.g. el.heating), prevents current strokes in the main ! Function: 2x Delay ON (2 time relays in one) ! Time scale 0.1s - 10 days divided into 10 time ranges: 0.1s - 1s / 1s - 10s / 0.1min - 1min / 1min - 10min / 0.1h - 1h / 1h - 10hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / ON / OFF ! Times t1 and t2 are independantly adjustable ! t1 and t2 are switched on after supply voltage connection ! Rought time setting via rotary switch ! Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V ! Output contact: 2 x changeover /DPDT 16 A ! Output indication: multifunction red LED, flashing at certain states ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code SJR-2 /230V: 8595188116015 SJR-2 /UNI: 8595188117401 Symbol SJR-2 Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Power input (apparent/loss): Supplyvoltagetolerance: Supplyindication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 2x delay ON A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 days rotaty switch and potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) 230 UNI Technical parameters Connection Function Un A1 A1 16 18 26 A2 28 U t1 15-18 t2 25-28 25 26 28 A2 15 25 15 16 18 Description 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW multifunction red LED 3x107 0.7x105 max. 150 ms Supply voltage terminals A1 A2 Output indication Supply voltage indication U Rought time setting t1 t1 Fine time setting t1 15-18 25-28 Rought time setting t2 t2 LED Fine time setting t2 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) UNI - 88 g (3.1 oz.), 230 - 83 g (2.9 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 25 15 16 26 28 Output contact 18 Output contact Time ranges m 10 1 h 1 10 10 S1 m 10 1 10 S1 12 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 m 0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 hrs h 1 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 ON OFF 10 1 10 1 10 S1 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 m 1 - 10 s 10 1 0.1 - 1 day h 1 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 ON OFF 10 1 10 S1 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 m 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 days h 1 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 ON OFF 10 1 10 1 10 S1 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 m 1 - 10 min only ON h 1 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 ON OFF 10 1 10 1 10 S1 1 d 10 0.1 - 1 h ON OFF h 1 10 1 d 10 ON OFF only OFF Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T ! It serves for delay ON of motors star/delta ! Time t1 (star) - time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges - rough time setting by rotary switch ! Time t2 (delay) between / : - time scale 0.1 s - 1 s - fine time setting by potentiometer EAN code CRM-2T /230V: 8595188112291 CRM-2T /UNI: 8595188112437 Technical parameters Voltage range: AC 230 V, AC/DC 12 - 240 V ! Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16A ! Output indication: multifunction red LED ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting Symbol CRM-2T UNI 18 16 A1 1 A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V/AC 50 - 60 Hz AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W -15 %; +10 % green LED t1: 0.1 s - 100 days, t2: 0.1 s-1 s potentiometer 5% - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) 230 Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Supply indication: Time scale: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (resistive): Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Terminal wire capacity: ! A2 26 15 28 25 Connection CRM-2T Start up of motor( - ) (motor) start of a motor S1 S3 auxiliary voltage ( ) ( ) S2 A1 L1 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW multifunction red LED 3x107 0.7x105 max. 150 ms CRM-2T 25 26 28 L2 15 16 18 (motor) S2 S3 Description Supply terminals -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 max.1x 2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 84 g (3 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Function ( ) ( ) S1 L3 A1 Dimensions: Weight: Standards: A2 A2 Output indication multifunction red Supply indication Rought time setting t1 Fine time setting t1 U 15-18 25-28 LED t1 t2 230 V LED Fine time setting t2 24-480V 25 15 16 26 28 Output contact 18 Output contact Time ranges t1: m Delay ON star / delta 10 1 10 S1 U 15-18 25-28 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 0.1 - 1 s t1 t2 m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 1 - 10 s 1 d 10 30 100 1 - 10 hrs m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 0.1 - 1 min 1 d 10 30 100 0.1 - 1 day m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 1 - 10 days h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 1 - 10 min m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 3 - 30 days h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 0.1 - 1 h m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 10 - 100 days 13 Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H Cycler with independent adjustable switch ON/OFF Used for regular room ventilation, cyclic dehumidification, light control, circulating pumps, noon signs, etc. ! 2 time functions: 1) Cycler beginning with pulse 2) Cycler beginning with pause ! Function choice is done by an external jumper of terminals S-A1 ! Time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /1 day - 10 days / 3 days - 30 days / 10 days - 100 days) ! Rough time setting via rotary switch ! Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V ! Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A ! Output indication: multifunction red LED ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! ! EAN code CRM-2H /230V: 8595188124201 CRM-2H /UNI: 8595188113007 Symbol CRM-2H Technical parameters 2 (function is chosen by connecting S-A1) A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 100 days rotary switch and potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) 230 UNI Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Power input (apparent input/loss input): Operating range: Supply indication: Time scale: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (resistive): Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Terminal wire capacity: Dimensions: Weight Standards: Connection Cycler beginning with pulse Cycler beginning with pause (jumper S-A1) Un 16 A1 Un 18 - + S 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW multifunction red LED 3x107 0.7x105 max. 150 ms - + A1 S A2 A1 S A2 15 16 18 15 16 18 15 A2 Function Cycler beginning with pulse Cycler beginning with pause U U S 15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 Description -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) UNI - 65 g (2.3 oz.), 230 - 61 g (2.2 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Supply terminals A1 S A2 Terminal for function selection Supply indication Output indication multifunction LED Rought time setting -IMPULSE U 15-18 Fine time setting-IMPULSE t1 t2 t1 LED Rough time setting -PAUSE Fine time setting -PAUSE Time ranges m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 0.1 - 1 s m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 1 - 10 s 1 d 10 1 - 10 hrs 14 h 1 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 m 10 1 10 S1 0.1 - 1 min 1 d 10 30 100 0.1 - 1 day m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 1 - 10 days h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 10 1 10 S1 1 - 10 min m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 3 - 30 days h 1 10 m 1 d 10 30 100 0.1 - 1 h m 10 1 10 S1 h 1 10 1 d 10 30 100 10 - 100 days 15 16 18 Output contact Multifunction time relay CRM-61 ! Multifunction time relay (6 functions and 6 time ranges), economic version of CRM-91H ! To be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps, fans, etc. ! 6 functions: - 3 time functions controlled by supply voltage - 3 time functions controlled by control input ! Easy to use function and time-range setting by rotary switches ! Time scale 0.1 s - 10 hrs divided into 6 range: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h rs/ 1 hrs - 10 hrs ) EAN code CRM-61 /UNI: 8595188120210 ! Universal Voltage range: AC 24-240 V, DC 24 V ! Output contact: 1x changeover 8 A/ SPDT ! Multifunction red LED output indicator flashes or shines depending of status ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting Technical parameters CRM-61 Number of functions: Supply terminals: Supply voltage : Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Controlling Control. voltage: Control power input: Load between S-A2: Glow-tubes: Control. terminals: Max. capacity of cable control: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): 6 A1 - A2 AC 24 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) a DC 24 V AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W 15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 h rotary switch and potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C Symbol Connection Un Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A/ AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC multifunction red LED 8 A / AC1 1x107 1x105 UNI AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W Yes No A1-S 0.1μF min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 120 ms 18 A2 A1 S S 15 A2 16 15 18 Function a b d e k i -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 max. 2x 2.5, max. 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5, 2x1.5 mm2 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 69 g (2.4 oz. ) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 16 A1 U t Delay ON after energization t U t Delay OFF after energization t U t t t t t Cycler beginning with impulse after energization t S t Delay OFF after de-energization, instant make of output t Impulse relay with delay, press its delay ON and next press its delay OFF output if it happens before expiration time <t S t S t Delay ON after make of the switch till break t Description Supply terminals Control input „S“ A2 A1 S Supply indication Output indication CRM-61 Rought time setting Fine time setting Function setting 16 15 18 Output contact 15 Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S Multifunction time relay can be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps and fans (10 functions, 10 time ranges, multi-voltage, 16Amps or 3x8Amps contacts) ! Fulfills all requirements for time relays ! 10 functions: - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage - 4 time functions controlled by control input - 1 function of latching relay ! Comfortable and well-arranged function and time-range setting by rotary switches ! Time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs /0.1 day - 1 day/ 1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF) ! CRM-91H, CRM-93H: Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V, Output contact: CRM-91H: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A; CRM-93H: 3 x changeover/SPDT 8 A ! CRM-9S: Universal supply voltage AC 12 - 240 V AC 12 - 240 V, absolutely noise-less switching 1x static contactless output (triac) 01.7 A (60A/<10 ms), switches potential A1 ! Multifunction red LED output indicator flashes or shines depending of status ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! EAN code CRM-91 /230V: CRM-91 /UNI: CRM-93H /230V: CRM-93H /UNI: CRM-9S /UNI: 8595188112444 8595188112420 8595188112789 8595188112468 8595188116008 CCA CRM-91H Technical parameters 16 CRM-93H CRM-9S UNI 10 A1 - A2 230 Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Consumption (apparent/loss): Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Voltage drop on switch: Load on B1 terminal: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Controlling Power on control input: Load between S-A2: Control. terminals: Glow tubes connections: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Symbol Connection CRM-91H AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12VA / 1.9W AC max. 12VA / 1.3W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 days rotary switch and potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) AC 12-240V (50-60Hz) AC max. 0.35VA x x Un - + 16 A1 S A1 18 S A2 15 A2 15 16 18 Un CRM-93H - + 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8A / AC1 16A / AC1 2000VA / AC1, 192W / DC 4000VA / AC1, 384W / DC 10A / <3s 30A / <3s 250V AC1 / 24V DC 500mA x x multifunction red LED 3x107 0.7x105 1x static contactless output (triac) 0.7A x 60A / <10ms x x max. 0.9 V at I max. Yes / I max. 0.7 A > 108 >108 AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V), AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA (AC 12 - 240 V) YES A1-S NO YES UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO 230 V - max.20 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms glow lamps cannot connected/NO x max. 250 ms -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4kV(supply-output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (UNI) - 64 g (2.26 oz.); (230) - 62 g (2.2 oz.) (UNI) - 89 g (3.1 oz.); (230) - 87 g (3 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 A1 16 A1 18 26 28 36 S A2 38 35 36 38 25 26 28 S 15 A2 35 25 15 16 18 Possibility to connect load onto controlling input It is possible to connect the load (e.g.: contactor) between terminals S-A2, without any interruption of correct relay function. 16 + Un 18 A1 S A2 load 15 Un x 51 g (1.8 oz.) CRM-9S A1 /B1 S 18 18 A1 S A2 A2 B1 18 18 Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S Function On Delay (Power On) Single Shot When the input voltage U is applied, timing delay t begins. Relay contacts R change state after time delay is complete. Contacts R return to their shelf state when input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function. a Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the preset time t begins. During time-out, the trigger signal S is ignored. The relay resets by applying the trigger switch S when the relay is not energized. U t t S f t t Single Shot Trailing Edge (Non-Retriggerable) Interval (Power On) When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and timing cycle begins. When time delay is complete, contacts return to shelf state. When input voltage U is removed, contacts will also return to their shelfstate. Trigger switch is not used in this function. b Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the preset time t begins. At the end of the preset time t, the relay contacts R return to their normal condition unless the trigger switch S is opened and closed prior to time out t (before preset time elapses). Continuous cycling of the trigger switch S at a rate faster than the preset time will cause the relay contacts R to remain closed. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state U t t Repeat Cycle (Starting Off ) When input voltage U is applied, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts R change state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function. c On/Off Delay U t t t t t Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts R change state and remain transferred until trigger switch S is opened. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state. t Repeat Cycle (Starting On) When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, contacts return to their shelf state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function. d g h Latching relay U t t t t t Input voltage U must be applied continuously. Output changes state with every trigger switch S closure. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state. t Off Delay (S Break) S t t S t i S j U t t t Pulse generator Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, relay contacts R change state. When trigger switch S is opened, delay t begins. When delay t is complete, contacts R return to their shelf state. If trigger switch S is closed before time delay t is complete, then time is reset. When trigger switch S is opened, the delay begins again, and relay contacts R remain in their energized state. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state. e Upon application of input voltage U, a single output pulse of 0.5 seconds is delivered to relay after time delay t. Power must be removed and reapplied to repeat pulse. Trigger switch is not used in this function. S t t t t PULSE PULSE PULSE=0.5 s Time ranges m 10 1 h 1 10 10 S1 m 10 1 ON OFF h 1 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 10 1 0.1 - 1s ON OFF 10 1 1 - 10 hrs ON OFF h 1 10 m 1 d 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 h 1 10 10 1 1 - 10 s 10 S1 ON OFF 10 1 0.1 - 1 min ON OFF 10 1 0.1 - 1 day m 1 d 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 h 1 10 h 1 10 10 S1 10 1 1 - 10 days ON OFF m 1 d 10 10 S1 m 1 d 10 h 1 10 ON OFF h 1 10 10 1 1 - 10 min 10 S1 ON OFF 10 S1 m 1 d 10 10 1 only ON h 1 10 10 S1 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 0.1 - 1 h 1 d 10 ON OFF only OFF Description Supply terminals A1 S A2 Control input “S” Supply indication Output indication-multifunction LED Examples of signaling Rought time setting Function: a U 15-18 LED Fine time setting Function setting Function:e U S 15-18 LED 15 16 t t 18 Output contact Notes 1) CRM-93H doesn’t allow switching of different phases or 3-phase voltages. 2) When mounting into steal-plated switchboards, it is necessary keep safety distance of min. 3 mm from terminal’s screws 35-36-38 and 25-26-28 towards the shutter of a switchboard. 17 Time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE ! Control by external control unit - potentiometer (can be for example on switch board doors or in panel) ! CRM-91HE: multifunction time relays 10 functions - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage - 4 time functions controlled by control input - 1 function of latching relay time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF) ! CRM-2HE: asymmetric cycler 2 time functions - cycler beginning with pulse - cycler beginning with gap function selected via external wired link on control input S-A1 ! CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE : ! Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V ! Output contact: 1x changeover 16 A/SPDT ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! Possible to connect external potentiometer - max. distance 10m (32.8 ft.) from relay EAN code CRM-91HE /UNI + potentiometr: 8595188142052 CRM-2HE /UNI + potetiometr: 8595188142069 Potentiometr for CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE : 8595188125215 Technical parameters Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Controlling Control. voltage: Consumption of input: Load between S-A2: Glow-tubes: Control. terminals: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: CRM-91HE CRM-2HE 10 2 A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 days 0.1 s - 100 days rotary switch, external potentiometer 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C Symbol Potentiometer to CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE A1 16 18 B1 B1 B2 B3 B4* external control unit A2 15 B2 B3 (B4)* *B4 only for CRM-2HE Connection 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW multifunction red LED 3x107 0.7x105 UNI AC 0.025-0.2VA / DC 0.1-0.7W Yes No A1-S min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms Description CRM-91HE Control input “S” Supply voltage indication Rought time setting A1 S A2 A1 Supply terminals Intup for external time control Output indication -multifunction LED A2 B1 B2 B3 Example of signaling U 15-18 LED Function setting U S 15-18 LED B1 B3 B2 h t t Free position 16 15 18 Output contact 15 16 18 Supply terminals Input for external time contol - IMPULSE CRM-2HE A1 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 77 g (2.7 oz.) 78 g (2.8 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 S Setting of IMPULSE A1 S A2 B1 B3 B2 Control input “S” Supply voltage indication Rought time setting-IMPULSE Rought time setting-PAUSE S A2 B1 B2 B4 B1 B4 B2 Setting of PAUSE 15 16 18 Output indication-multifunction LED CRM-2HE B1 15 16 B4 B2 Input for external control time-PAUSE 18 Output contact Potentiometer Function Functions of CRM-91HE are identical with CRM-91H. Functions of CRM-2HE are identical with CRM-2H. 18 Potentiometer: Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Weight: Dimensions: 47 kΩ, linear IP 65 from front side/ IP 20 from back side 1.5 mm2 with sleeve / without sleeve max.2.5 (AWG 12) 15 g (0.5 oz.) see page Accessories Plug-in time relay PRM-91H, PRM-92H, PRM-2H ! ! EAN code PRM-91H-8 /UNI PRM-91H-11 /UNI PRM-92H /UNI PRM-2H /UNI 8595188135511 8595188111638 8595188111096 8595188111645 Technical Parameters Number of functions: Supply: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Control Control. voltage: Control power input: Load between 5-10: Glow-tubes: Control terminals: Max. capacity of cable control: -without connected glow-lamps: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Multifunction time relay PRM-91H 11 and 8 pin type 10 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 1x 16 A / 4000VA, 250V AC1 ! Multifunction time relay PRM-92H 11 pin type 10 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1 ! Asymmetric cycler PRM-2H 11 pin type 2 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 100 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1 ! Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V Output indication: multif. red LED, flashing at certain states PLUG-IN relays ! ! PRM-91H/8 pins 2 and 7 PRM-91H/11 PRM-92H Multifunction time relays are equivalents by module types of relay, designed to standardized plump 11 or 8pin socket Pin type enables easy changing, replacement older type of relays (pin-compatible) or easy changing auxiliary relay for time relays PRM-2H 10 2 pins 2 and 10 pins 2 and 10 pins 2 and 10 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.1 s - 10 days 0.1 s - 100 days rotaty switch and potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) Symbol LEGEND TO DESCRIPTION polarity- outputs/number on module/on socket PRM-91H PRM-92H, PRM-2H 11 pin 8 pin 4 A1/2/+ 3 A1/2/+ 1 5 A2/10/- 5 A1/2/+ 3 4 1 A2/7/- 5 A2/10/- 3 4 1 8 9 11 Recommended socket for DIN rail Connection PRM-92H/11 PRM-91H/8 ES-11A ES-8 5 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 8A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 10 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW multifunction red LED 3x107 0.7x105 6 5 7 4 4 8 3 9 2 10 1 + A1 -A2 7 2 11 Un 6 3 1 + A1 8 Un -A2 8 pin 11 pin Description / Connection Supply indication Output indication in the supply voltage range AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI) Yes No 2-5 d Rought time setting Fine time setting Function setting 0.1μF min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms Supply indication Functions PRM-2H 57 g (2.01 oz.) -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 2.5 kV any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel III. 2 50 x 38 x 53 mm (2˝ x 1.5˝ x 2.1˝) 57 g (2.01 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Time ranges of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H. Time ranges of PRM-2H are identical with CRM-2H. See page 17. Choice Function in PRM-2H is done by connecting terminals 2 and 5 Cycler beginning with pulse U 2 5 Output indication Rought time setting IMPULSe Fine time setting IMPULSe t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 Rought time setting PAUSE Cycler beginning with pause Fine time setting PAUSE R U 58 g (2.05 oz.) 2 5 S R t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 Functions of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H. See page 17. 19 Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B ! Multifunction programmable digital relay with 4 digit red LED display ! Control and setting is done by 3 buttons, user-friendly menu, absolute accuracy in timer setting, time countdown on a display galvanically separated START and STOP control inputs with UNI supply EAN code PDR-2A /230V: PDR-2A /UNI: PDR-2B /230V: PDR-2B /UNI: 8594030333037 8594030333044 8594030333051 8594030333068 PDR-2/A Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Consumption (apparent/loss): Supply voltage tolerance: Time ranges: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical strength (AC1): Control Control input Burden: Glow lamps: Control. impulse length: Reset time: Display - colour: Number and height of digits: Luminace: Light wavelength: Brightness setting: Memory - memory locations: Data stored for: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 16 20 230 UNI Technical parameters ! Thanks to its complexity it is possible to program also more demanding time functions by using 2 independent times ! 2 independent times, with combination of 2 inputs and 2 outputs ! PDR-2/A: 16 functions, choice of functions of the other relay, 30 memory places for most frequently used times ! PDR-2/B: 10 functions, 1 output of 10 functions can be assigned to each relay = 2 relays in one device ! 2 independent times in range: 0.01 s - 100 hrs ! Supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting PDR-2/B 10 A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.5 - 2.5 VA / DC 0.4 - 2.5 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 16 VA / 2.5 W -15 %; +10 % 0.01 s - 100 h 0.2 % - set value stability 0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F) 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 AC 0.01 - 0.25 VA (UNI), AC 0.25 VA (AC 230 V) No min. 1 ms / max. unlimited max. 200 ms red 4 positions with separating colon, height 10 mm (0.39˝) 2200 - 3800 ucd 635 nm range 20 - 100 % in 10 steps adjustable 30 (PDR-2/A) / 20 (PDR-2/B) for times ranges + service function min. 10 years -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) (UNI) - 143 g( 5 oz. ), (230) - 134 g( 4.7 oz. ) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Symbol 16 A1 PDR-2 18 26 28 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2 15 A2 25 Description Control inputs Supply terminals Indication of operating times (t1, t2) Indication of time (h, m, s) Indication of output status Controlling buttons 26 25 28 18 15 16 Output 2 Output 1 Time data Time range: Minimal time step: Time deviation: Setting error: Setting, reset accuracy: Digital places: 0.01 s - 99 h 59 min 59 sec 99 ss 0.01 s 0.01 % of set value 0% 100 % selected via program Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B Connection PDR-2/A START input for output 1 (t1) PDR-2/B START input Un Un STOP input A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2 A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2 PDR-2 t1 PDR-2 h t2 m s t1 out 1 mode START input for output 2 (t2) stop h t2 m s out 1 out 2 start mode 16 15 18 28 25 26 stop start out 2 16 15 18 28 25 26 output 1 output 2 16A AC1/250V 16A AC1/250V output 1 output 2 16A AC1/250V 16A AC1/250V Function Functions for PDR-2/A and PDR-2/B 1. Delay ON 2. Delay OFF 3. Delay ON after break of control. contact 4. Delay ON at make of control. contact 5. Delay OFF after break of output contact 6. Delay OFF at make of output contact Functions for PDR-2/A A1-A2 15-18 11. Cycler beginning with impulse with A1-A2 variable interval 15-18 t1 A1-A2 15-18 12. Cycler beginning with pause with A1-A2 variable interval 15-18 t1 A1-A2 START 15-18 13. Generator of impulse t1 14. Changeover star/delta A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 15A. Shift of pulse by 2 times A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 15B. Shift of impulse by 2 times A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 7. Delay OFF at break A1-A2 of control. contact with instant output START 15-18 8. Delay OFF at make of control. contact with delayed output 9. Cycler beginning with impulse 10. Cycler beginning with pause 16A. Extended impulse by 2 times t1 16B. Extended impulse by 2 times A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 A1-A2 15-18 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 A1-A2 15-18 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 A1-A2 START 15-18 t2 t1 A1-A2 15-18 25-28 t1 t2 t1 t2 A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 t2 A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 t2 A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 t2 A1-A2 START 15-18 t1 t2 Recommendation: PDR-2/B is replacing by 2 simple time relays = 2 in one. 21 Digital time switch clock SHT Output Time programm This time switch clock SHT is used to control various appliances in 1 channel 2 channel day week month real time; daily, weekly, monthly and annual mode ! Switching: according the program (AUTO)/constantly manually, manually to next program change/random (CUBE) ! „Holiday program” option to choose an interval when the device doesn´t switch according to the standard program, but will be block during that time ! Automatic conversion summer / winter time ! Sealable cover of front panel, easy controlling via 4 buttons ! 100 memory places, clear LCD display, min. interval 1 s ! Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V ! Cyclic output ! Pulse output ! SHT-1, SHT-3: one channel version, 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals ! SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2: two channel version, 2-MODULE, an individual program can be run on each channel ! EAN code SHT-1 /230V: SHT-1 /UNI: SHT-1/2 /230V: SHT-1/2 /UNI: SHT-3 /230V: SHT-3 /UNI: SHT-3/2 /230V: SHT-3/2 /UNI: 8595188130424 8595188130431 8595188130400 8595188130417 8595188136761 8595188136754 8595188129015 8595188129046 Technical parameters Dimensions: Weight: Standards: UNI 230 Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Back-up supply: Summer/winter time: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Time circuit Power back-up: Accuracy: Minimum interval: Data stored for: Cyclic output: Pulse output: Program circuit Number of memory places: Program (SHT-1; SHT-1/2): Program (SHT-3; SHT-3/2): Data readout: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Polution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): SHT-1, SHT- 3 SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2 A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.5 - 2 VA / DC 0.4 - 2 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 14 VA / 2 W -15 %; +10 % yes automatic Symbol SHT-1 SHT-3 16 A1 SHT-1/2 SHT-3/2 18 16 A1 18 15 A2 15 A2 26 28 25 Connection SHT-1 SHT-3 SHT-1/2 SHT-3/2 A1 16 15 18 A1 16 15 18 1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO2) 2x changeover/DPDT (AgSnO2) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW 3x107 0.7x105 up to 3 years max. ±1s/ day at 23 °C (73.4 °F) 1 min min. 10 years 1-99s 1-99s 100 daily, weekly daily, weekly, monthly, yearly (up to year 2095) LCD display, with back light Un Un A2 A2 26 25 28 Description of displayed elements on the screen mode choice output switching indication (1st channel) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Auto Prog Man shows the day in the week indication of the pulse/ cyclic output indication (2nd channel) AM/PM shows summer / winter mode indication of closed output 7 output ON/OFF random switching mode 0 6 12 18 24 manual switching mode channel 1(bargraph) channel 2 (bargraph) Description Channel 1 (16-15-18) Supply terminals (A1) -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 10 clips, IP 40 from front panel III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝) A1 18 15 16 7 Auto Transparent cover Display 12 6 0 SHT-3 Reset MAN2 OK MAN 1 ESC PRG + RESET Controlling buttons Sealing spot A2 26 25 28 (UNI) - 130 g (4.6 oz.), (230) - 110 g(3.9 oz.) (UNI)- 143 g 143 g (5 oz.), (230) - 125 g (4.4 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Supply terminals (A2) 22 year Channel 2(26-25-28) only for SHT-1/2, SHT-3 /2 Digital time switch with an astronomical program SHT-4 Used for controlling the lighting (billboards, advertisements, shop windows, etc.) with no light sensor required Function: - by entering the geographic coordinates, the lighting can be switched on/off by sunrise and sunset ! the preset coordinates for European cities, with optional manual adjustment of the geographical coordinates ! during programming, 120 minutes may be added to the time of sunrise and sunset ! selection of ON/OFF functions at sunrise or sunset - astro-clock with adjustable interruption - operating hours counter for each channel - timer - switching on the basis of real-time ! Two-channel design, where each channel is programmable independently of the other ! Automatic switching between winter and summer time ! Sealable transparent cover on the front panel ! Data and time backup using the battery ! Battery life - up to 3 years ! Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required ! Supply voltage: AC 230 V ! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! ! EAN code SHT-4 8595188144759 Technical parameters Power supply terminals: Supply voltage: Input power: Supply voltage tolerance: Real time back-up: Transition to summer / winter time: Output Number of contacts: Rated current: Switching power: Peak current: Switching voltage: Min. DC switching power: Mechanical service life: Electrical service life (AC1): Timing circuit Real time reserve: Accuracy of operation: Minimum triggering interval: Program data storage period: Programming circuit Number of memory locations: Program: Data display: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage category: Polution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: SHT-4 Symbol A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 14 VA / 2 W -15 %; +10 % yes automatic 2 x changeover (AgSnO2) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW > 3x107 > 0.7x105 up to 3 years max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C 1 minute 10 years at minimum 100 daily, yearly (until 2099) LCD display, backlight Wiring A1 16 18 26 A1 16 15 18 28 Un A2 15 25 A2 26 25 28 Description of items displayed on the screen Displaying the day in week Status indication (1st channel) Status indication (2nd channel) Auto + t Prog Operation mode indication Man Displays 12/24 hour mode Indication of the switching program Date display of setup menu Time display Control button MAN2 / ESC Control button PRG+ Reset Control button OK Control button MAN1 / - -20.. +55°C -30.. +70 °C 4 kV (power supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 10 terminals, IP 40 from front panel III. 2 max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm2 90 x 35.6 x 64 mm 133 g EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Device description Output - Channel 1 (16-15-18) Supply voltage terminal (A1) A1 18 15 16 Auto Backlight display MAN 2 OK MAN Control buttons ESC PRG + RESET _ Lead-sealing point Plug-in module A2 26 25 28 Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery With battery Type of backup battery: Without battery Supply voltage terminal (A2) Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28) CR 2032 (3V) 23 The SHT-6 time switch with DCF managing ! NEW ! ! ! ! ! ! DCFR-1 ! ! ! ! ! Used for controlling appliances depending on real time, that is synchronized by a DCF 77 signal, thanks to the automatic time settings (with DCF 77 signal) it eliminates inaccuracies and errors by time running 1 channel design with external DCF receiver Automatic switching between winter/summer time Sealable cover of the front panel 100 memory locations Backlit LCD display Switching according to the program: auto / manual / random / holiday program Backing up data and time using the battery Reserve battery for up to 3 years Easy replacement for the backup battery with plugging module without detaching the device Power supply: AC 230V 2-MODULE, mounting on DIN rail Symbol N EAN code SHT-6 8595188148382 DCFR-1 8595188148412 Technical parameters Terminals Supply Voltage Supply: Tolerance of voltage supply: Output Number of contacts: Rated current: Switching capacity: Peak current: Max. switching voltage: Minimum switching capacity DC: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Time circuit Backup real. time: Running accuracy: Without DCF receiver Minimum switching interval: Data retention programs: Program circuit Number of memory locations: Program: Displayed data: Other information Working temperature: Storage temperature: Dielectric strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection: Over voltage category: Degree of pollution: Cable size (mm2) Dimension: Weight: Related standards Connection DCF SHT-6 B1 B2 A1 16 A1 G B1 B2 18 A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz -15 %; +10 % DCFR-1 A2 1 x changeover (AgSnO2) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW > 3x107 > 0.7x105 15 A2 16 15 18 L Description of the displayed elements on the screen Displaying the day of the week up to 3 years max. ±1 s a day with 23°C 1 min min. 10 years 100 daily, yearly ( till year 2099 ) LCD display with backlight -10.. +55°C -30.. +70 °C 4 kV (output supply) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP10 terminals, IP40 from the front panel III. 2 max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4 with max. ferrule 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm2 90 x 35.6 x 64 mm 140 g EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Status indication ( 1st channel ) Status indication ( 2nd channel ) Auto + t Prog Indication of operating mode Man Displaying 12/24 h Indication of the switching Diplaying the set-up menu data Displaying the time Control button MAN2 / ESC Control button PRG / + Reset Control button OK Control button MAN1 / - Description Connecting the receiver DCFR-1 Terminal N Backlit display MAN 2 OK MAN RESET Plug-in module Control buttons ESC PRG + _ Sealing place Plug module for replacement battery backup With battery Type of backup battery: 24 Without battery CR 2032 (3V) Terminal L Output - channel (16-15-18) DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77 Universal DCF module, which is designed for controlling the SHT-6 timer, and other devices. Outdoor applications (IP65) ! Two-wire connection - not polarity sensitive! ! Length of connecting cable is up to 100 m ! Visual indication of proper function module ! ! Technical parameters DCFR-1 Connection: Max. cross-connection conductors: Max voltage on the wires: Indication Function: Other information Storage temperature: Protection: Dimension: Weight: Operating position: The reception area: Connected to SHT-6 Working position - options 2 conductors 2.5 mm2 10 V red LED Income (input) direction -30.. +70 °C IP65 98 x 62 x 34 mm 110 g perpendicular to the direction of reception about 1500 km from Frankfurt / Main LED max. 100 m 25 Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B Multifunction relay designed for installation into a wiring box or under wall-switch in an existing electrical installation Advantageous and fast solution for exchanging standard wall-switch for a switch controlled by time or for an impulse relay controlled by a button ! More information about type and size of load for these products can be found on page 111 ! SMR-K ! SMR-H - 3-conductor connection, works without the connection - 4-wire connection of a neutral conductor. - power output: 0 - 200 VA - power output: 10-160 VA - it can not be used for fluorescent lamp and energy saving - for flawless function of the product is necessary the presence bulb (capacitive load) of a load R, L or C between input S and neutral wire ! SMR-B - 4-wire connection ! SMR-T - 10 functions - 3-wire connection, works without the connection - output contact 1x16A / 4000 VA, 250V AC1 of a neutral conductor - enables switching of fluorescent lights and also energy - power output: 10 - 160 VA saving lights - between input S and neutral wire is possible connect any - suitable for switching loads greater than SMR-K, SMR-T, load R, L, or C – that is not necessary (unlike SMR-K) SMR-H, for example pulse relay, stair automatic switch, switching of ladder radiators in bathrooms - independent galvanically separated input AC/DC 5-250 V, for example for control from a security system ! ! SMR-K SMR-T SMR-H EAN code SMR-K /230V SMR-T /230V SMR-H /230V SMR-B /230V 8595188145176 8595188129107 8595188129114 8595188135566 Technical parameters SMR-K SMR-T SMR-H SMR-B Description SMR-H Exchangeable fuse Output indication FUSE 5x20 Number of functions: 9 10 Connection: 3-wire, without neutral 4-wire, with neutral Voltage range: AC 230V / 50-60Hz Power input (no operation/make): 0.8 / 3VA max 1 / 1VA Supply voltage tolerance: -15%; +10% Time ranges: 0.1 s - 10 days Time setting: via rotaty switch Time deviation: 10 % - mechanical setting Repeat accuracy: 2 % - set value stability Temperature coefficient: 0.1 % / °C, at = 20 °C Output Number of contacts: 1 x triac 1x NO(AgSnO2) Resistive load: 10 - 160 VA 0 - 200 VA 16A 125/250 V AC1 Inductive load: 10 - 100 VA 0 - 100 VA 8A 250 V AC (cos φ > 0.4) Control Control voltage: AC 230 V AC230V, UNI-5-250VAC/DC Control current: 25μA 3 mA Impulse length: min. 50ms / max. unlimited Glow tubes connetions: x Yes Max. amount of glow lamps 230V - max. amount 50 pcs connected to controlling input: (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) Other information Operating temperature: 0..+50°C Operating position: any Mounting: free at connecting wires Protection degree: IP30 in standard conditions Overvoltage cathegory: III. Pollution degree: 2 Fuse: F 1A / 250V x Connection: 3x CY, Ø 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18) 4x sol. wir., Ø 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18) 2 x CY, Ø 0.75mm2 (AWG 18) lenght 90mm (3.5˝) lenght 90mm (3.5˝) 2 x CY, Ø 2.5 mm2 (AWG 10) Glow-lamps in control button: x max.10 max.20 Dimensions: 49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝) Weight: 26 g (0.92 oz. ) 26 g (0.92 oz. ) 27 g (0.95 oz. ) 53 g ( 1.9 oz.) Standards: EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Rought time setting Fine time setting FUSE 5x20 SMR-B Function setting Output Neutral (only in SMR-H) Phase Switch (button) SMR-B Galvanically separated control input 5-250 V AC/DC Rought time setting Function setting Fine time setting Output indication Neutral Output Phase Switch (button) Time ranges m 10 1 h 1 10 10 S1 m 10 1 10 S1 26 0.1 - 1 s m 1 d 10 10 1 10 S1 ON OFF h 1 10 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 1 - 10 hrs m 10 1 10 S1 1 - 10 s m 1 d 10 10 1 10 S1 ON OFF h 1 10 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 0.1 - 1 day m 10 1 10 S1 0.1 - 1 min m 1 d 10 10 1 10 S1 ON OFF h 1 10 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 1 - 10 days m 10 1 10 S1 1 - 10 min m 1 d 10 10 1 10 S1 ON OFF h 1 10 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 only ON m 10 1 10 S1 0.1 - 1 hrs 1 d 10 ON OFF h 1 10 1 d 10 ON OFF only OFF Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B Function Function a - delay OFF on entrering edge output times when it is switched. Each following pressing (max. 5x) increases time. Long pressing swithes output off S V tt Function b - delay OFF on downward edge output times after button is swithed off, switches immediately S V Function c - delay OFF on downward edge after switching off output switches on and times. S V Function d - cycler - flasher impulsem output cycles in regular interval, cycler starts with an impulse Function e - puls shift delay on after the switch is switched on and delay on after it is switched off Function f - delay ON delay on after switch is switched on until it is switched off S V t Function g - impulse relay switches on by a press, another pressing switches the output off. The length of pressing doesn’t matter, it is possible to set reaction delay by a potentiometer and thus eliminate rebound of a button S V t t Function h - impulse relay with delay one press switches on, another one switches the output off in case it is done before the end of timing S V t S V t t t t tt Function i - cycler starting with pause output cycles in regular intervals, cycler starts with a pause S V t t t t t t S V t Function j* - cycler starting with gap delay ON until switched off until it is de-energized or a switch is pressed again. Note.: *- Function j is valid only for SMR-B S V t >2 s t2xt t t t t tt t t t Connection SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B N L V L V S SMR-K Typical wiring of SMR-K, SMR-T - timer for lamp unit L S V L S N SMR-T SMR-H Fan control depending on the SMR-K , SMR-T lighting Typical wiring of SMR-H - timer for lamp unit V L S N N S L V SMR- SMR-H Fan control depending on the lighting Input for external control voltage AC/ DC 5-250 V Note: The products of the SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H are not intended for switching capacity load (energy saving light bulbs and LED lights with capacity power etc.), these products are only intended for switching resistive and inductive loads (incandescent bulbs, fans, etc.). For other types of traffic is determined by the SMR-B with relays output. This output is possible to switch the load character of R, L or C-values listed in the load table. Between inputs S and neutral wire is possible to connect any load of R, L or C, however this is not (unlike the SMR-K) condition. Example of connection SMR-T Original connection neutral wire N AC 230 V AC 230 V N Control of an appliance by button Output to an appliance incoming phase wire L neutral wire incoming phase wire L Button Button (switch) N neutral wire L incoming phase wire Output to an appliance AC 230 V After the light bulb switch is switched off, fan starts operating and after set time switches off . Switch 27 Staircase switch CRM-4 ! Used for delayed switching of lights in the corridors, entrances, stairways, halls or for delayed finish of fans (WC, bathro- om, etc.) ! It is controlled by a button or by several buttons from more places (connected in parallel) buttons can be equipped by glow lamps (max. 20 pcs of glow lamps) ! Output relay contact 16 A/AC1 with surge current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and fluorescent lamps ! Operating system switch: AUTO - normal Function according to set time OFF – permanently OFF (e.g. when changing bulbs) ON – permanently ON (e.g. while cleaning, servicing) ! Time range: 0.5 - 10 min ! Time setting by potentiometer ! Supply voltage : AC 230 V ! Protection against button blocking ( e.g. a match inserted in a button) ! 1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code CRM-4 /230V: 8595188115605 Technical parameters Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Control Control voltage: Power on input: Load between S-A2: Control terminals: Glow tubes connetions: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: CRM-4 delay off reacting to control contact switching A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0.5 - 10 min potentiometer 10 % - mechanical setting 5 % - set value stability 0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F) 1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO2) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 AC 230 V AC 0.53 VA Yes A1-S Yes AC 230V - max. amount 35 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 62 g (2.2 oz.) EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1 Function Connection A1 16 It is possible to connect load between S-A2 (e.g. contactor, control of light or any other device), without disturbing a correct function of relay (load is energized while the switch is ON). 18 16 18 A1 S A2 15 Un S load A2 15 Circuit connection 3-wire connection 4- wire connection L L N N A1 S A2 A1 S A2 250V � AC1 16A/4000VA 250V� AC1 16A/4000VA 15 16 18 15 16 18 Description Supply terminals A1 S A2 Controlling contact Output indication Supply indication Operating system swich Time setting 15 16 18 Output contact U AUTO switch S t 28 Symbol t t OFF ON Programmable staircase switch with signalling before switch off CRM-42, CRM-42F Intelligent staircase switch, the same use as CRM-4, but with enlarged possibility of control in mode „PROG“, it is possible to select time of delayed OFF by number of button pressing. Each pressing multiplies time set by potentiometer, it means that in case you set time to 5 min and press the button 3 times, then the output is automatically prolonged to 15 min. Output can be also switched off before time (reset) by long pressing of button (longer than 2 sec) ! Output relay contact 16A/AC1 with inrush current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and also fluorescent lights ! Operating system switch: ON - output is constantly ON (service mode) AUTO - timing according to adjusting by potentiometer in range 30 s - 10 min PROG - timing with time prolongation option by number button pressing ! Timing (in mode AUTO and PROG) is possible to be stopped by long pressing of the button (> 2 s) ! Voltage range: AC 230 V, clamp terminals ! Output indication: multif. red LED, flashing at certain states ! Possibility to connect up to 100 buttons equipped with glow lamps (in total 100mA) ! 3-wire or 4-wire connection (it is possible to control input S by potential A1 or A2) ! Warning before switch OFF- output doubleflash 40 and 30 sec before switch OFF ! CRM-42F: Staircase switch without warning flashes especially suited for use with energy-saving lamps, where frequent flashing may cause damage to the light source ! 1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! EAN code CRM-42 /230V: 8595188136693 CRM-42F /230V: 8595188146883 Technical parameters Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time ranges: Time setting: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Electrical life (AC5b): Control Control voltage: Input Burden: Glow tubes connetions: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Control. terminals: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: CRM-42 / CRM-42F delay OFF responsive to control contact switch on A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W -15 %; +10 % green LED Mode AUTO: 0.5 - 10 min, Mode PROG potentiometer 5 % - mechanical setting 5 % - set value stability 0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F) 1x NO - SPST(AgSnO2), switches potencial A1 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 8x104 (bulbs 1000 W) * AC 230 V AC 0.53 VA Yes 230V - max. amount 50 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) A1-S or A2-S min. 50 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5, (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 65 g (2.3 oz.) EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1 Connection 3- wire connection A2 S A1 18 4- wire connection A2 S A1 18 N L N L Description Controlling input Supply terminal A2 S A2 Supply indication Output indication multifunction red LED Operating system switch Time setting A1 Supply terminal A1 18 Output contact Function MODE AUTO MODE ON U S U S t 400ms 2s t 18 18 red LED red LED MODE PROG (the illumination time is defined by number of button pressing) U >2s S t t t t t t 18 red LED Symbol A1 * For bigger bulb loads and frequent switching is recommended to intensify the contact relay with power contactor e.g. VSXXX S A2 18 29 Notes 30 Auxiliary and Power relays VS(B,K) VS116B/230 VS116K VS308K VS316/24 VS316/230 Supply voltage : AC 230 V Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A. Supply voltage : AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A. Supply voltage : AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V Output contacts: 3x changeover/ SPDT 8A. Supply voltage : AC/DC 24 V Output contacts: 3x changeover/SPDT 16 A, possibility to be connected into 3-phase circuit. Supply voltage : AC 230 V Output contacts: 3x changeover/ SPDT 16 A, possibility to be connected into 3-phase circuit. VS(U) VS116U VS308U Supply voltage : AC/DC 12-240 V Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A. Supply voltage : AC/DC 12-240 V Output contacts: 3x changeover/ SPDT 8 A. 750L 782L ES-15/4NA - socket 782L Max. voltage: 12 A Weight: 59 g Mounting to DIN rail Designated for 4-contact relay. Power relays plug-in Output contacts: 4 x changeover contact/ SPDT 6 A Plug-in type. 750L ES-11A- socket Power relays plug-in Output contacts: 3 x changeover contact / SPDT 10 A Plug-in type. Max. current: 10 A Weight: 60 g Monting to DIN rail Designated for 3-contact relay. VS116B/230 MINI VS116K 1M-DIN VS116U 1M-DIN VS308K 1M-DIN VS308U 1M-DIN VS316/24 1M-DIN VS316/230 1M-DIN 782L 750L PLUG-IN PLUG-IN 1x16 A changeover/ SPDT 1x16 A changeover/ AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V SPDT 1x16 A changeover/ AC/DC 12..240 V SPDT 3x8 A changeover/ AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V 3PDT 3x8 A changeover/ AC/DC 12..240 V 3PDT 3x16 A changeover/ AC/DC 24 V 3PDT 3x16 A changeover/ AC 230 V 3PDT 4x8 A changeover/ AC 6-230 V, 4PDT DC 6-110 V 3x16 A changeover/ AC 6-230 V, 3PDT DC 6-110V AC 230 V/50-60 Hz # page of catalogue Designation Paralel diode RC unit LED signal light Output contact Coil voltage Design Type Other features VS116/B230 MINI, with installation into junction box or ceiling that allows control of lights, shades or awnings drives 32-33 # # # as a separation relay (4kV), direct switching of appliances up to 4000VA (e.g. heaters), well visible signalization, noiseless 32-33 # # # as VS116K, but multivoltage supply coil 32-33 # # # a “multiplication” of contacts, 3x changeover contact/ 3PDT only in 1-MODULE, well visible signalization, noiseless 32-33 # # # as VS308K, but multivoltage supply coil 32-33 # # # 3x changeover contact in 1-MODULE, possibility of “multiplication” of contacts and in the same time possibility of switching high output, possibility of 3 phase switching 32-33 # # # as VS316/24, but AC 230V 32-33 # compact small relay for installation into plug relay, basic version equipped by LED indication, detent and testing lever 34-35 # as 782, but into 11-pin round socket, 3x changeover contact / 3PDT 16A/250V 34-35 More about contact loadability on page 111 31 Power relays modular type VS ! Power relay used for switching larger load output, strengthen or „multiplying“ contacts of the existing device Current rating 16 A VS116K 16 A VS116U 16 A VS116/B230 8A VS308K 8A VS308U 16 A VS316/24 16 A VS316/230 Type Number of contacts 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 Design Supply terminals DIN (1M) DIN (1M) BOX (MINI) DIN (1M) DIN (1M) DIN (1M) DIN (1M) A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24V AC/DC A1 - A2 12- 240V AC L-N 230V AC A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24 V AC/DC A1 - A2 12-240V AC/DC A1 - A2 24V AC/DC A1 - A2 230V AC ! Relays VS316/24, VS316/230 enable connection to a 3-phase circuit ! In the design 1-MODULE , DIN rail mounting, output status indicated by high intensity LED with choice of LED color (red, green, yellow, blue or white LED*) EAN code see page 33 Technical parameters VS116B/230 VS116K Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Time between switching: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): L-N AC 230 V/50-60 Hz AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W x x x AC 230 V/50-60 Hz AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W A1-A3 AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz) AC 1 VA/ DC 1W Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! VS116/B230 MINI, mounting in installation box or ceilings, enabling switching of lights, motors for blinds or awnings ! For VS116/B230 status of output indicated by LED on front panel of device VS116U VS308K A1 - A2 AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC max. 10.3 VA/ 1.1 W AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W A1-A3 x AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz) x AC 1 VA/ DC 1W x -15%; +10% 3 x changeover/3PDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy) 8 A/ AC1 2000VA/ AC1, 192W/ DC 10 A/ <3s 250 V AC1/ 24 V DC 500 mW high intensity of LED 3x107 0.7x105 min. 2s 1 x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2) 16 A/ AC1 4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC 30 A/ <3s red LED min. 2s free at connecting wire IP 30 2x 0.75 mm2, 3x 2.5 mm2 49 x 49 x 21 mm 48 g EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1 VS308U 54 g (1.9 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.) -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply-output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel III. 2 max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 max. 1x2.5 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 52 g (1.83 oz.) 83g (2.9 oz.) EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1 VS316/24 VS316/230 AC/DC 24 V/ 50-60 Hz 1.6 VA/ 1.2 W x x x AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz 2.5 VA 3 x changeover/ 3PDT (AgSnO2) 16A/ AC1 4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC 30 A/ <3s 20 ms 1x107 1x105 50 ms 90 g (3.17 oz.) 92 g (3.25 oz.) Symbol VS116B/230 L N A1 14 A2 A3 11 VS316/24 A1 A2 32 VS116U VS116K 12 12 A1 14 A2 11 14 22 11 24 32 34 21 31 A1 A2 14 A1 11 A2 A3 VS308U 12 14 22 11 24 32 21 34 31 A1 A2 12 14 22 11 24 32 21 Notes: VS316/230 12 VS308K 12 12 14 22 11 24 32 21 34 31 Max. time of changeover of contact is 10ms. VS316/24 or VS316/230 enables switching of different phases or 3 phase voltage. * possibility to choose blue, white and yellow color of LED for power relays line VS in case of minimal order quantity 100 pcs. 34 31 Power relays modular type VS Description VS116K, VS116U VS308K, VS308U Supply terminals A2 A3 A1 A1 Supply terminals 2nd output changeover contact A2 A3 21 22 24 Indication LED Indication LED Red/čevená Red/piros 11 12 11 14 31 Output changeover contact 34 3rd output changeover contact 2nd output changeover contact Supply terminals 24 A1 1st output changeover contact VS116B/230 VS316/24, VS316/230 22 14 terminal A3 only for VS308K terminal A3 only for VS116K 21 32 12 A2 Indication LED Output indication 31 11 12 32 34 14 Output changeover contact 3rd output changeover contact Neutral wire Output changeover contact Phase wire EAN codes VS116U /red VS116U /green VS116U /yellow VS116U /white VS116U /blue VS116K /red VS116K /green VS116K /yellow VS116K /white VS116K /blue 8595188124607 8595188136433 8595188138499 8595188138482 8595188138475 8595188122597 8595188122610 8595188122580 8595188122573 8595188122603 VS116B/230 8595188147543 VS308U /red VS308U /green VS308U /yellow VS308U /white VS308U / blue VS308K /red VS308K /green VS308K /yellow VS308K /white VS308K /blue 8595188130103 8595188136440 8595188138529 8595188138512 8595188138505 8595188122696 8595188122719 8595188122689 8595188122672 8595188122702 VS316 /230 red VS316 /230 green VS316 /230 yellow VS316 /230 white VS316 /230 blue VS316 /24 red VS316 /24 green VS316 /24 yellow VS316 /24 white VS316 /24 blue 8595188135559 8595188136075 8595188136082 8595188136051 8595188136068 8595188135771 8595188136105 8595188136129 8595188136099 8595188136112 33 Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L ! Used for switching a higher power (load) than that of the switched element amplifier ! For auxiliary lighting control, signalization, the relay interlockings, boilers, HDO, heaters ! 3x changeover contacts of 10A(AgNi) for 750L ! 4x changeover contacts of 6A(AgNi) for 782L ! Recommended bases - ES-11A base for 750L, ES-15/4NA base for 782L 750L Technical parameters Contacts Number of switching contacts Contact material: Rated voltage: Rated current: peak current Switching capacity Switching capacity Switching capacity Switching capacity Minimum switching voltage / current: Coil Rated Voltage (DC): Rated voltage (AC, 50-60Hz): Rated power (AC / DC) Tolerance of supply voltage: Isolating data Rated insulation voltage (AC): Dielectric strength (AC) coil - contact: contact - contact: Isolating resistance at 500 V DC: Distance contact - coil air: surface: General information Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Max. switching frequency at rated load: Without load: Pick-up time / returning contact: Working temperature: Storage temperature: Protection: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 34 782L 750L 782L 3 AgNi AC 250 V/440 V (50 - 60 Hz) 10 A 20 A 10A/250A 3A/120V/1.5A/240V 10 A / 24 V DC 0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V 5mA/5V 1.5W/DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V 6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V AC 2.8 VA (50Hz) /2.5 VA (60Hz)/ DC 1.5 W -20 / +10 % 4 AgNi AC 250 V/250 V (50 - 60 Hz) 6A 12 A 6A/250A 1.5A/120V/0.75A/240V 6 A / 24 V DC 0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V 5mA/5V 1.5W/DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V 6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V AC 1.6 VA/ DC 0.9 W -20 / +10 % 2500 V 2500 V 2500 V 1500 V 10 7 Ω 2500 V 1500 V 10 7 Ω ≥ 3 mm ≥ 4.2 mm ≥ 1.6 mm ≥ 3.2 mm ≥ 2x107 ≥ 2x105 10A/250V AC 1x107 5 ≥ 10 6A/250V AC 1200 cycles / hrs 12000 cycles / hrs max. 12/10 ms -40.. +55 °C (AC) -40 .. +85 °C IP40 from the front panel 35 x 35 x 54.4 mm 83 g EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1 1200 cycles / hrs 18000 cycles / hrs max. 10/8 ms -40.. +55 °C -40.. +85 °C IP40 from the front panel 27.5 x 21.2 x 35.6 mm 35 g EN 61810-1, EN 60255-1-00, EN 61810-7 Coil data for 750L Product Type AC voltage 5006 5012 5024 5048 5060 5115 5120 5220 5230 5240 DC voltage 1006 1048 1060 1110 1120 1012 1024 1220 Voltage[V] Resistance [Ω] AC 6 AC 12 AC 24 AC 48 AC 60 AC 115 AC 120 AC 220 AC 230 AC 240 4.3 18.5 75 305 475 1 840 1 910 6 980 7 080 7 760 DC 6 DC 48 DC 60 DC 110 DC 120 DC 12 DC 24 DC 220 28 1 750 2 700 9 200 11 000 110 430 37 000 Coil data for 782L Product Type AC voltage 5006 5012 5024 5042 5048 5060 5080 5110 5115 5120 5127 5220 5230 5240 DC voltage 1005 1006 1012 1024 1048 1060 1080 1110 1125 1220 Voltage [V] Resistance[Ω] AC 6 AC 12 AC 24 AC 42 AC 48 AC 60 AC 80 AC 110 AC 115 AC 120 AC 127 AC 220 AC 230 AC 240 9.8 39.5 158 470 740 930 1 720 3 450 3 610 3 770 4 000 15 400 16 100 16 800 DC 5 DC 6 DC 12 DC 24 DC 48 DC 60 DC 80 DC 110 DC 125 DC 220 28 40 160 640 2 600 4 000 7 100 13 600 16 000 15 400 Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L Connection The 750L connection The 782L connection Socket ES-11A - for 750L Socket ES-15/4N - for 782L ES-11A Max. Current: 10A Weight: 60 g Mounting on DIN rail Designed for 3- relay contacts Max. Current: 12A Weight: 59 g Mounting on DIN rail Designed for 4- relay contacts Accessories to ES-11A - for 750L Accessories to ES-15/4NA - for 782L Clip to relay 750L: 16-1351 swivel label - TR1 ES-15/4NA The LED module, the protective diode and R/C member can be assigned into the slot. EAN code 750L/110V DC 750L/120V AC 750L/12V AC 750L/12V DC 750L/230V AC 750L/24V AC 750L/24V DC 750L/48V DC 750L/6V AC 750L/6V DC 782L/110V DC 782L/120V AC 782L/12V AC 782L/12V DC 782L/230V AC 782L/24V AC 782L/24V DC 782L/48V AC 782L/48V DC 782L/6V AC 782L/6V DC 8595188129992 8595188130028 8595188130011 8595188129978 8595188119221 8595188119207 8595188125147 8595188129985 8595188130004 8595188129961 8595188129923 8595188129947 8595188119085 8595188119030 8595188119115 8595188119092 8595188119047 8595188129954 8595188129916 8595188129930 8595188129909 ES-15/4NA ES-11A ES8 Clip to relay 750L Clip to relay 782L 8595188119245 8595188129879 8595188136167 8595188119283 8595188119276 35 Dimmers R, L R, L, C R, L, C MODULAR DIM-2 DIM-5 staircase switch with gradual dimming up/ down, level and time of illumination, all values are adjustable. R = 10 -500 VA L = 10 -250 VA DIM-15 DIM-14 as DIM-5 but dims all types of loads, in-built protection against temperature and current overload, electronic fuse. R = 500 VA L = 500 VA C = 500 VA control by a button/ buttons ( connected in parallel), short pressing ON/OFF, long pressing regulates brightness, memory storing. R = 10 -500 VA L = 10 -250 VA MODULAR LIC-1 designated for dimming of 1) LED lamps and LED lighting sources 2) dimmable energy saving fluorescent lamps intensity controller for maintaining the constant illumination level. Dimmable energy saving fluorescent lamps, LED lamps. R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads MINI DIM-6 SMR-S DIM6-3M-P power dimming to 2kW. Can be controlled by button, external potentiometer, 0-10 V (1-10 V) system iNELS. R = 2000VA L = 2000 VA C = 2000VA as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch into an installation box KU-68 (or the similar), 3 wire connection (without neutral). R = 10-300VA L = 10-150 VA DIM6-3M-P is a power module expansion unit for DIM-6. It cannot be operated independently. R = 1000VA L = 1000 VA C = 1000VA SMR-U SMR-M as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch into an installation box KU-68 (or the similar). R = 1000VA L = 1000 VA C = 1000VA for mounting under a wallswitch into an installation box KU-68 (or similar). Dimmable energy saving fluorescent lamps, LED lamps. Recommendation for mounting: Recommendation for mounting modular dimmers: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4” ) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device. Output # x x triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA - # x DIM-5 1M-DIN AC 230V # # x x triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA - # x # # Type DIM-14 1M-DIN AC 230V # # # R ESL LED x L C 2x x MOSFET 500 VA* 500 VA* 500 VA* 2x x x is expanding power modul for controlled dimmer DIM-6 41 - # x as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral) is expanding power modul for controlled diммer DIM-6 44 500VA* 500VA* # # as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into an installation box 44 - # # # 42 300 VA* 300 VA* # # designated for dimming of: 1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources 2) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps for maintaining the constant illumination level. ESL dimmable compact fluorescent lamps, LED lamps, R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads - - # # DIM-6 6M-DIN AC 230V # # # x x MOSFET 2 000 VA* 2 000 VA* 2 000 VA* DIM-6-3MP 3M-DIN AC 230V # # # x x SMR-S BOX AC 230V # # x x SMR-U BOX AC 230V # # # x x SMR-M BOX AC 230V - - - # # 2x MOSFET 1M-DIN AC 230V # # # # # 2x 300 VA* MOSFET LIC-1 - # 4x 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* MOSFET triac 10-300VA* 10-150VA # 39 # - 2x 500VA* MOSFET designated for dimming of: 1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources 2) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps for controlled dimming of lights up to 2kW, with a possibility of module extention up to 20kW (el.bulbs and hallogen lights, also with ballast type C or L) 38 # AC 230V 2x as DIM-5, but dims all types of load, inbuilt protections against thermo and current overload, electronic fuse 37 x 1M-DIN # staircase switch with gradual dim-up/dim-down, level and length of illumination, all values are adjustable control by button/buttons (connected in parallel), short pressing ON/OFF, long pressing regulated brightness, memory recording x DIM-15 MOSFET Catalogue page # C Rated load Designation AC 230V L output unit 1M-DIN R LED lamps DIM-2 Design OFF-DIMMER Dimming principal ON-DIMMER resistive (el. bulbs, halogen lights) inductive (wound transformers) capacitive (electronic transformers) energy saving fluorescent lamps Supply voltage Type of dimmed load 42 40 45 Note: * - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure sufficient cooling Expandatory: R, L, C Dimmer with designatedload: R - RESISTIVE L - INDUCTIVE C - CAPACITIVE type of load bulbs, halogen lamps low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V WIth wound transformers R L LED lamps (symbols) ESL - energy saving fluorescent lamps LED - LED lamps Demonstrated symbols are informative 36 low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V ESL dimmable compact fluorescent WIth electronic transformers lamps C ESL LED Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2 Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers Intelligent control of halogen lights, function of gradual switching on and dimming ! Controlling inputs for push button and switch ! Values are set by potentiometers on front panel of the product, adjustable: - maximum dim-up - speed (fluency) of dim-up - speed (fluency) of dim-down - time for which a light is on with maximum dim-up ! All time intervals can be adapted according to a request ! Output without contact: 1x triac ! Load AC 5b (el. bulbs) 500 W ! Clamp terminals ! Parallel connection of controlling pushbuttons is possible ! Protection against over-temperature inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED flashing ! Note: possibility of start and finish adjustment up on 1 hour, device has description DIM-2 1h ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! ! EAN code DIM-2 /230V: 8595188112475 DIM-2-1h /230V: 8595188135740 Symbol Technical parameters: DIM-2 Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time setting by: Time deviation: Repeat accuracy: Temperature coefficient: Recovery time: Controlling T1 (button) Terminals: Voltage: Power on control input: Impulse length: Glow-lamps: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Controlling T2 (switch) Terminals: Voltage: Power on control input: Impulse length: Output Current rating: Resistance load: Inductive load: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 Hz max. 5 VA -15 %; +10 % green LED potentiometers 10 % - mechanical setting 5 % - set value stability 0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C max.80ms Connection L A1 A1 V T2 T1 T2 T 2.5 A recomended fuse V A2 A2 T1 - A1 AC 230 V max. 1.5 VA min.100 ms /max. unlimited Yes 230V - max. amount 50 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) T1 R, L N Description Output Supply terminal A1 Controlling input for switch V A1 T2 Supply indication T2 - A1 AC 230 V 0.1 VA min.100 ms /max. unlimited Output indication - brightness setting t1 - dim-up time settting t3 - dim-down time setting 2A 10 - 500 VA 10 - 250 VA t2 - time delay setting -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 65 g (2.3 oz.) EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1 A2 Supply terminal A2 T1 Controlling input for push button Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module (approx. 9 mm) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device. Function Legend: Controlled via input T1(button) Brightness: 10-100% t1 Dim-up time: 1-40 s t2 Time delay: 0s-20min t3 Dim-down time: 1-40s t1 t3 t2 T1 Controlled via input T2 (switch) Dim-up delay-down is started by a button. Cycle extensionanother button pressing (during cycle). t3 t1 t2 The switch starts the cycle and it stops on max.set brightness. After the switch is off, the cycle will continue until completed. T2 37 Controlled dimmer DIM-5 EAN code DIM-5 /230V: 8595188115612 Technical parameters Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Controlling Control terminals: Control voltage: Power control input: Impulse length: Glow-lamps: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Output Current rating: Resistance load: Inductive load: Output indication: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Operating position Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): ! Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers ! For switching and dimming lights in corridors, stairways... control input for push-buttons (parallel connection possible) ! Short press turns light on/off, longer press (> 0.5 s) provides dim up / dim down ! When switched off , brightness level is stored in a memory and when On again it restores last brightness level ! Voltage range: AC 230 V ! Contactless output, triac 2A/ 500 VA ! LED output indication (with any level of brightness) ! Possibility to connect control buttons in parallel ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! Clamp terminals ! Protection against over-heating inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED flashing Symbol DIM-5 Connection A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 Hz max. 5 VA -15 %; +10 % green LED L A1 A1 V T - A1 AC 230 V max. 1.5 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited Yes 230V - max. amount 50 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) T 2.5 A recomended fuse T A2 A2 T R, L N Description 2A 10 - 500 VA 10 - 250 VA red LED Output Supply terminal A1 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 58 g (2 oz.) EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1 Dimensions: Weight: Standards: A1 V Output indication Supply indication Function A2 Supply V Supply terminal A2 A1-A2 T Controlling input for push button Output Brightness Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device. Controlling contact T LED 38 <0.5s <0.5s >0.5s <0.5s >0.5s <0.5s Controlled dimmer DIM-14 ! Designed for dimming of incandescent bulbs and halogen lights with wound or electronic transformer ! For switching and dimming of lights, control inputs for a button ! Short impulse switches ON/OFF, longer impulse (>0.5s) enables gradual light intensity setting ! Last intensity level is stored in memory when switched off ! Voltage range: AC 230 V ! Output without contacts: 2x MOSFET ! LED output indicator with any level of brightness possibility of parallel connection of control buttons ! Resistive, inductive or capacitive load, up to 300 W, for a short term up to 500 W ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! Electronic overvoltage protection ! Protection against over-heating inside the device - output off EAN code DIM-14 /230V: 8595188135955 Technical parameters Symbol DIM-14 Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Dissipated power: Indication output: Controlling Control terminals: Control voltage: Power control input: Impulse length: Glow-lamps: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Output Contactless: Current rating: Resistance load: Inductive load: Capacitive load: Output state indication: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): A1-A2 AC 230 V / 50 Hz 1.3 W -15 %; +10 % 6 VA green LED Connection L A1 A1- T AC 230 V AC 0.3-0.6 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited Yes 230V - max. amount 20 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) A1 V T 2.5 A V DIM-14 T A2 A2 T R, L, C N 2 x MOSFET 2A 500 VA* 500 VA* 500 VA* red LED Description Supply terminal A1 A1 V Output Supply indication -20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F) -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 58 g (2 oz.) EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1 Dimensions: Weight: Standards: DIM - 14 A2 Output indication T Supply terminal A2 Function Supply A1-A2 Button output * When load is above 300 VA it is necessary to ensure sufficient cooling. Output Brightness Controlling input T recomended front-end protection Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device. <0.5s <0.5s >0.5s >0.5s <0.5s Warning for DIM-14: it is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time. 39 Controlled dimmer DIM-6 Designed for RLC dimming lights, also available for appliance switching ! DIM-6 can be controlled by: button (parallel button connection), external potentiometer, analog signal 0-10 V (1-10 V), iNELS system bus 2 2 2 2 EAN code DIM-6 /230V: 8595188136914 Technical parameters ! DIM-6 ! Actuator manages output 230 V AC, controlled by 1 semi-conductor. Maximum output power is 2000 VA ! Power range can be increased up to 10 000 VA by module DIM6-3M-P ! Electronic overcurrent protection, overvoltage and short-circuit protection ! Protection against over-heating inside device - switch off output+signalize overheat by flashing red LED ! 6-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting Symbol L Supply terminals: L, N Supply voltageí: AC 230 V / 50 Hz (x) - according to control type setting Input: 10 VA Tolerance of Voltage range: -15 %; +10 % Max. output power: max. 2 000 VA Dissipated power: 2.5 % from load Types of indication LED Module extendable: to 10 000 VA - Yellow-indicates configuration of load RL Galvanic separation of bus and power output: yes - Yellow-indicates configuration of load RC Isul. volt. between outputs and inner circuits: 3.75kV, SELV according to EN 60950 Control - button type - Green-button control mode selected Control voltage: AC 12-240V - Green - 0-10 V signal control mode selected Control terminals: S - S, galvanically separated - Green – 1-10 V signal control mode selected Power of control input: AC 0.53VA (AC 230V), AC 0.025-0.2VA (AC 12-240V) - Green – CIB conductor bar-INELS control mode selected Length of control impulse: min. 25ms / max. unlimited - Yellow – indicates CIB conductor bar data transfer comunication max. 150ms Recovery time: - Red – indicates overload, flashing LED signalizes over-heating inside the device, shinnig LED Connection of glow lamps: NO (AC 230V); NO (AC 12-240V) Control 0(1)-10V: signalizes current overload 0(1)-10V, GND Control terminals: 0-10V or 1-10V Control voltage: Device description 1mA Min. current of control input: 14 13 CIB control: 1 12 CIB+, CIBControl terminals: Bus voltage: 27V DC 5mA Current of control input: 11 2 Indication of data transmission: yellow LED Output 3 Contactless: 4 x MOSFET 10 A Current rating: Resistive load: 2 000 VA* 4 10 5 Inductive load: 2 000 VA* Capacitive load: 2 000 VA* yellow LED, according to load type Indication of output state: Other information Operating temperature: -20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) Storing temperature: vertical Operating position: Mounting: DIN rail EN 60715 9 6 Protection degree: IP 40 from front panel 8 Purpose of control device: operative control device 7 Construction of control device: individual control device 1 Terminals for CIB bus 6 Terminals for connecting 11 Button for output control Char. of automatic operation: 1.B.E connection control button Heat and fire resistance cat.: FR-0 2 Load type indication 7 Terminals of neutral wire 12 Terminal for additional modul Anti-stroke category (immunity): class 2 conductor bar Rated impulse voltage: 2.5 kV 3 Control type indication 8 Terminal for phase conductor 13 Terminals for control by signal Overvoltage category: III. connection 0(1)-10V, or by potentiometer Pollution level: 2 Profile of connecting wires : 4 CIB data transfer indication 9 Output terminals 14 Terminal for regulation load of - output part: max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) wire jumper - control part: max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 5 Overload indication 10 Button for output control Dimensions: 90 x 105 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 4.1˝ x 2.6˝) Weight: 410 g (14.5 oz.) * Warning : it is not allowed to connect inductive and capacitive loads at the same time. Standards: EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014 V R,L,C (x) 40 N Expanding power module DIM6-3M-P ! Expanding power module only for use in combination with DIM-6 ! DIM6-3M-P provides power increasement (of about 1000VA) of load connected to DIM-6 (it means: 2 000VA (DIM-6) + 1 000VA (DIM6-3M-P) = 3 000VA) ! DIM-6 can be connected with up to 8 DIM6-3M-P to expand power up to 10 000 VA ! Attention-device has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device ! DIM-6 in installation is cooled by natural air flow. If the natural air flow access is reduced, cooling has to be provided by ventilator. Rated operating temperature is 35°C/ 95 °F EAN code DIM-6-3M-P: 8595188139106 Technical parameters DIM6-3M-P Load Dissipated power: Output Contactless: Current rating: Resistive load: Inductive load: Load capacity: Other information Operating temperature: Storing temperature: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Controlling device purpose: Controlling device construction: Automatic operating char.: Heat and fire resistance category: Imunity category: Rated impuls voltage: Overvoltage category: Pollution level: Profile of connecting wires (mm2) - output part: - control part: Size: Weight: Standards: max. 1 000VA 2.5 % from load ! If there are several DIM6-3M-P connected to DIM-6, the distance between them has to be min. 2 cm/ 0.8” ! Max. lenght of bus EB is 1 m/ 39.4” and the connection has to be realized by schielded cable Device description Terminal for additional modul conductor bar 2 x MOSFET 5A 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* -20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) vertical DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel operating control device additional control device 1.B.E FR-0 class 2 2.5 kV III. 2 max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 /with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 134 g (4.7 oz.) EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014 EB1 L EB2 L EB4 EB3 L EB5 V V V Output terminals Phase connection term *Warning: it is not allowed to connect loads of inductive and capacitive character at the same time Connection 0(1)-10V CIB+ CIB - 50k F max.15A* L N 2 2 2 2 R, L, C *Potencial L on device terminal, has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device. 41 Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fluorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! SMR-M DIM-15 EAN code DIM-15/230V: 8595188140690 SMR-M: 8595188143776 Technical parameters DIM-15 Supply terminals: Voltage range: Operating range: Apparent power: Loss power: Dissipated power: Supply indication: Control Control terminals: Control wire: Control voltage: Control input power: Control impulse lenght: Glow tubes connection: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Output Contactless: Load:* Output status indication: Other information Operating temperature: Storing temperature: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: A1-A2 x Overvoltage category: Pollution level: Terminal wire capacity: Connection: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Designated for dimming of: a) LED bulbs and LED light sources b) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps Enables gradual setting of luminance by push-button (non-detent) or parallel buttons Returns to last state upon re-energization Type of light source (LED or saving fluorescent lamp) is set by switch-over on the front panel of device Minimal luminance, set by potentiometer on the front panel, eliminates flashing of some types of saving fluorescent lamps DIM-15 Supply voltage 230V AC Output status is indicated by red LED: - shines when output is active -flashes while heating overload, at the same time output is disconnected 1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, saddle terminals SMR-M ! button-controlled dimmer intended to be installed in an installation box (e.g. KU-68) into the existing electrical wiring ! protection against excessive temperature inside the device - switches off the output SMR-M x 4-wire, with neutral AC 230 V / 50 Hz -15 %; +10 % max. 1.5VA max. 0.7W green LED A1 - T x x L-S AC 230 V AC 0.3-0.6 VA min. 80 ms / unlimited Yes 230V - max. amount 15 pcs 230V - max. amount 10 pcs Symbol Light source type setting A1 (L) DIM-15 (SMR-M) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps V T(S) A2(N) DIM-15 SMR-M L L N A1 V T 2.5 A recomended fuse (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) T 1.6 A recomended fuse 2 x MOSFET 300 W (at cos φ =1) red LED LED bulbs 160 W (at cos φ =1) x V A2 L N S T -20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F) N -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any Functions and controlling DIN rail EN 60715 free at connecting wires IP 40 from front panel / IP30 in standard IP 10 clips conditions Supplying Un >0.5s <0.5s III. T 2 V max. 2x2.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5, min max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12) x solid w. CY, Ø 0.75 mm2(AWG 18), V x lenght 90mm (3.5˝) min 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝) 57 g (1.98 oz.) 38 g (1.3 oz.) EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1 <0.5s >0.5s max max <0.5s Controlling: !short button press (<0.5s) turns the light off or on !long press (>0.5s) enables slight regulation of light intensity !setting of minimal luminance is possible only during decreasing of luminance by long button press Minimal luminance setting: „LED bulb“ : ! if the light is turned off, short press (<0.5s) switches the light onto last set luminance level * Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ. The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4. An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source. 42 „Energy saving lamp“ : !when light is off, short impulse turns lamp on and then luminance is decreased to set level ! setting of minimal luminance by saving fluorescent lamps serves for harmonizing of lowest light intensity prior its unprompted switching off Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fluorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M Device describtion Supply voltage L Supply voltage indication Light source type selection Output A1 V Output indication DIM - 15 Minimal luminance setting Minimal luminance setting Light source type selection Supply voltage indication Output to an appliance Switch (button) A2 T Supply voltage N Controlling input Phase Neutral Connection example N L Additional information ! it is possible to dim only LED bulbs equipped with capacitator supplying ! it is not possible to dim saving fluorescent lamps without marking: dimmable !an incorrect setting of light source has effect only on dimming range, it means neither dimmer or load get demaged ! maximal load is counting with usage of LC filter ! actual list of tested light sources is constantly refreshing, further information on www.elkoep.com/products/ 43 Controlled dimmer SMR-S, SMR-U Button-controlled dimmers designated for flush mounting into a wiring box, into an existing electroinstallation (SMR-S doesn´t need neutral for correct function) ! Used to control lamp brightness, dimming, possible to control from more places (parallel connections) ! Protection against temperature overrun inside the device – output off ! By changing wall-switch for a switch with SMR-S/SMR-U installed below you can reach effective brightness control ! SMR-S enables dimming of electric bulbs 12 V, halogen lights with wound transformers (inductive load) ! SMR-U enables also dimming 12 V halogen lights with electronic transformers (capacitive load) ! It can not be used for dimming of fluorescent lamps and energy saving lamps ! SMR-S - 3-wire connection, functional without neutral - max. load: 300 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with wound transformer) - contactless output -1x triac - with exchangeable fuse ! SMR-U - 4-wire connection - max. load: 500 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with electronic or wound transformer) - contactless output - 2 xMOSFET - electronic over-heating protection - output off in case of short-circuit or overload ! EAN code SMR-S /230V: 8595188123518 SMR-U /230V: 8595188130738 Technical parameters SMR-S Connection: Voltage range: Power input (no operation/make): Supply voltage tolerance: Output Resistive load: Inductive load: Capacitive load: Control Control voltage: Current: Impulse lenght: Glow tubes connection: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Other information Operating temperature: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Fuse: Connection: Glow lamps in a button: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: SMR-U Connection SMR-S, SMR-U 3-wire con., without neutral 4-wire con., with neutral 230 V AC / 50Hz max. 3 VA -15 %; +10 % N L 500 VA* 500 VA* 500 VA* 10 - 300 VA 10 - 150 VA x AC 230 V max. 3 mA min. 50 ms / max. unlimited Yes 230V - max. amount 50 pcs 230V - max. amount 10 pcs V S SMR-S (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) 0 °C to +50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F) any free at connecting wires IP 30 in standard conditions III. 2 F 1.6A / 250V x solid wires 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18), lenght: 90 mm (3.5” ) max. number 10 49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9” x 1.9” x 0.5”) 32 g (1.1 oz.) 32 g (1.1 oz.) EN 61010-1, EN 60669-2-1 L Typical connection of SMR-S - dimmer of lights V R, L L S N SMR- U R, L, C Typical connection of SMR-U - dimmer of lights Warning: it cannot be used for fluorescent lights and energy saving lights! SMR-U: It is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time. Note: * - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure sufficient cooling. Function SMR-S, SMR-U Description of SMR-S Supply Output Brightness Controlling contact Indication <0.5s <0.5s >0.5s >0.5s Short press (<0.5s) turns a light on, another short press turns it off. A longer press (>0.5s) causes a gradual regulation of light intensity min-max-min round until the button is released. After releasing a set intensity is kept in memory, further short presses turn the light on/off keeping the set intensity. The intensity can be changed by further long press. After de-energising the relay remembers the set value. Button control input Phase 44 Exchangeable fuse <0.5s Output Lighting intensity controller LIC-1 Mounting of SKS photosensor on the wall Automatically regulates the intensity of light in a room External sensor scans the intensity and based on the preset value it decreases or increases the brightness of light ! Designed for dimming the LED lights, ESL - dimmable energy saving lamps, R - inductive, L - resistive and C - capacitive load ! Operating status: 1 - Off 2 - Automatic regulation 3 - Cleaning (maximum level of illumination) 4 - Setting the minimum lighting brightness 5 -Setting the desired level of illumination ! Optional connection of buttons with 50 neon lamps ! Blocking the automatic control via external signal, power supply 230V AC ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamping terminals ! ! EAN code LIC-1 8595188144933 SKS photosensor: 8594030337288 Technical parameters Supply voltage tolerance: Supply voltage: Supply voltage tolerance: Apparent/loss power input: Power supply indication: Control Button - control terminals: Control voltage: Control input power: Duration of control pulse: Glow tubes connection (terminals L-T): Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Blocking input - terminals: Control voltage: Input power: Glow tubes connection (terminals L-B): Duration of control pulse: Output: Output status indication: Load capacity:* Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Operating position: Mounting: Ingress protection: Overvoltage category: Contamination degree: Connecting conductor cross-section (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Mounting of SKS photosensor into the panel LIC-1 L-N AC 230 V / 50-60 Hz ±15 % max. 1.6VA / 0.8W green LED L-T AC 230 V max. 0.6 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited Yes 230V - max. amount 50 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) L-B AC 230V max. 0.1VA No min. 80 ms / max. unlimited 2x MOSFET red LED 300 W (at cos φ =1) -20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F) -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 57 g (1.98 oz.) EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1 * Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ. The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4. An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source. Function Control (external button): ! Pressing the button shortly (<0.5 s ) - always switches the light off ! Medium-long press (0.5 - 3s) - automatic control ! Long press (> 3s) - cleaning ! 3 x short presses from "off" - setting the desired level of illumination ! 5 x short presses from „off“ - setting the minimum brightness In mode 4 and 5, the lamp brightness changes periodically from minimum to maximum. At a required level of brightness, the value is stored into memory by pressing the button shortly. Connection Symbol L B L IN L V IN V T 2.5 A recomended front-end protection B IN IN N T T N glow-lamp N Sensor SKS Description Output Supply voltage L Blocking input L Supply voltage indication Selection of light source type V B Output indication Lighting-up speed setting* Dimming speed setting* IN IN Terminals for the connection of the SKS sensor N T Control input Supply voltage N *by automatic regulation Selection of light source type energy saving lights halogen lamp with electronic transformer LED lamp, 230 V 230 V bulb halogen lamp with ferromagnetic transformer 45 Power supplies Voltage Stabilized DC- switching Stabilized DC- linear Nonstabilized AC+DC 12V PSB-10-12 PS-10-12 PS-30-12 DR-60-12 PS-100-12 ZNP-10-12V IN: AC 100-250 V OUT: DC 12V stabil LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - thermo protection -MINI, into an installation box (such as KU-68). IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 12 V stabil LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W - galvanically separated - fusion safety - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 1 MODULE. IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 12 V stabil LOAD: 2.5A / 30 W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 3 MODULE. IN: AC 100-240 V OUT: DC 12 V stabil LOAD: 4.5A / 54 W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - range of incoming voltage - 4.5 MODULE . IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 12 V stabil LOAD: 8,4A / 100 W - galvanically separated - fusion safety - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 6 MODULE. IN: AC 230V OUT: AC/DC 12V nostabil LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA - galvanically separated - fuse - 3 MODULE. PSB-10-24 PS-10-24 PS-30-24 DR-60-24 PS-100-24 ZNP-10-24V IN: AC 100-250 V OUT: DC 24 V stabil LOAD: 0.42A / 10W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - thermo protection -MINI, into an installation box (such as KU-68). IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 24 V stabil LOAD: 0.42A / 10W - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 1 MODULE. IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 24 V stabil LOAD: 1.25A / 30W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 3 MODULE. IN: AC 100-240 V OUT: DC 24 V stabil LOAD: 2.5A / 60W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - 4.5 MODULE . IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 12 V stabil LOAD: 4,2A / 100 W - fusion safety - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 6 MODULE. IN: AC 230V OUT: AC/DC 24V nostabil LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA - galvanically separated - fuse - 3 MODULE. 24V Regulated PS-30-R ZSR-30 IN: AC 230 V OUT: DC 12-24 V regul., stab. LOAD: 2.5-1.25A / 30W - galvanically separated - electronic fuse - thermo protection - 3 MODULE. IN: AC 230V OUT: DC 5-24 V reg., stab. OUT: AC 24V, DC24V LOAD: 1.6-0.3A/10VA - range of incoming voltage -current restrictor - electronic fuse - 3 MODULE. Nonstabilized AC Bell transformer 46 ZTR-8-8 ZTR-8-12 ZTR-15-12 output voltage 8 V. Power: 8W. output voltage12 V. Power: 8W. output voltage 4-8-12 V. Power: 4V5V - 8V 10V- 12V 15V. Power supplies - # S # Page in catalogue # Designation - Short-circuit-proof Safety fuse # AC 12V 0.8 A DC 12 V AC 24V 0.4 A # DC 24V DC 5-24V # # AC 24 V 1.6 A- 0.3 A Switching (S) / Linear (L) # Output current 3M-DIN # Output voltage ZSR-30 # Stabilized 3M-DIN DC ZNP-10-24 AC 230 V, -15/+10% AC 230 V, -15/+10% AC 230 V, -15/+10% AC Design 3M-DIN Input voltage Type ZNP-10-12 Electronic fuse Protection against overload Output DC and AC nonstabilized, output voltage 12 V – where it is not required or 51 where there is stabilized differently/later DC and AC nonstabilized output voltage 24 V – where it is not required or 51 is stabilized later regulated output voltage in a wide range DC 5-24 V: possibility to adjust output voltage with load according to request # 51 PSB-10-12 MINI-BOX AC 100-250V # # DC 12 V 0.84 A S # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 10 W, box 48-49 PSB-10-24 MINI-BOX AC 100-250V # # DC 24V 0.42 A S # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V / 10 W, box 48-49 # # DC 12 V 0.84 A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 10 W, 1 module 48-49 # # DC 24V 0.42 A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V / 10 W, 1 module 48-49 # # DC 12 V 2.5 A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 30 W, 3 module 48-49 # # DC 24V 1.25 A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V / 30 W, 3 module 48-49 # # DC 12-24V 2.5 A-1.25 A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12-24 V / 30 W, 3 module 48-49 # # DC 12 V 8.4A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 100 W, 6 module 48-49 # # DC 24V 4.2 A S # # # stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24V / 100W, 6 module 48-49 # DC 12 V 4.5 A S # DC 24V 2.5 A S 8V 1A 12 V 4-8-12 V PS-10-12 PS-10-24 PS-30-12 PS-30-24 PS-30-R PS-100-12 PS-100-24 DR-60-12 DR-60-24 ZTR-8-8 ZTR-8-12 ZTR-15-12 AC 230 V, -20/+10% AC 230 V, 1M-DIN -20/+10% AC 230 V, 3M-DIN -20/+10% AC 230 V, 3M-DIN -20/+10% AC 230 V, 3M-DIN -15/+10% AC 230 V, 6M-DIN -20/+10% AC 230 V, 6M-DIN -20/+10% 4.5M-DIN AC 100-240V DC 124-370 V 4.5M-DIN AC 100-240V DC 124-370 V AC 230 V, 2M-DIN -15/+10% # AC 230 V, # 2M-DIN -15/+10% AC 230 V, # 3M-DIN +/- 10% 1M-DIN efficient switching power supply of DC voltage 12V / 54 W, wide range of 50 input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V) efficient switching power supply of DC voltage 24V / 60 W, wide range of 50 input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V) - # 0.66A - # 2-1.5-1A - # 52 bell transformer (short-circuit-proof) for supplying of bells, door openers, home call-boxes 52 52 47 Power supplies PS ! ! ! ! PS-10-24 ! PSB-10-24 EAN code PSB-10-12 8595188145022 PSB-10-24 8595188143783 PS-10-12V 8595188139052 PS-10-24V 8595188139069 Technical parameters: Input Voltage range: Burden without load (max): Burden with full load (max): Protection: Output Output voltage DC / max. current: PS-30-12V PS-30-24V PS-30-R PS-100-12V PS-100-24V PSB-10-12 ! PS-10-12 PSB-10-24 PS-30-12 PS-10-24 12.2V/0.84A 24V/0.42A 24.2V/0.42A 12.2V/2.5A Tolerance of output voltage: Output indication: Wave of off-load output voltage: Wave of output voltage with max load: Time delay after connection: Time delay after over-load Overload capacity: Efficiency: Electronic fuse: Other information Working humidity: Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength input- output: Protection degree: Overvoltage category: Polutioon degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Outlets: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: PS-30-R PS-30-24 AC 100-250V / 50 - 60Hz 4VA / 1,7W 9VA / 1W 10VA/1,5W 70VA / 37W 70VA / 37W fuse T2A AC 184 - 253V/50-60Hz 5VA / 2W 25VA / 13W fuse T1A AC 110 - 250V / 50-60Hz 3VA / 0.5W 26VA / 13W x 12V/0.84A ! 8595188137966 8595188139045 8595188136655 8595188137195 8595188139021 PSB-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fixed output voltage, for mounting into an installation box (such as KU-68) PSB-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12V/10W PSB-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24V/10W PS-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fixed output voltage, version 1-module PS-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/10 W PS-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/10 W PS-30: switching stabilized power supplies, version 3-module PS-30-12 - stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V/30 W PS-30-24 - stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V/30 W PS-30-R – stabilized regulated power supply 12-24 V/30 W PS-100: stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage, version 6-module PS-100-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/100 W PS-100-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/100 W Output current is limited by electronic fuse, in case maximal current is exceeded, the device switches off and after a shot time interval it again switches on. Indication of output voltage by green LED on front panel (except PSB-10) Temperature protection – if temperature is exceeded, the device switches off and after cooled down, it switches on again 12.2V/2.5A 24.2V/1.25A 24.2V/1.25A PS-100-24 PS-100-12 AC 184-253V/50-60Hz 6VA / 2W 195VA / 118W fuse T 3.15A 12.2V/8.4A 24.2V/4.2A ± 2% green LED 40mV 80mV 30mV 40mV 55mV 380mV 20mV 500mV 5mV > 75% > 75% 80mV max. 1s max. 1s max. 120% of rated output >82% >81% >82% electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage 20 .. 90% RH -20 °C to +40 °C (-4 °F to 104°F) -40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F) 4kV IP40 device/ IP20 in-built in distribution board II. 1 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5 x 90 x 52 x 65 mm 90 x 52 x 65 mm 158 g 158 g 158 g EN 61558-1, EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-17 IP30 x solid wire CY, Ø 4x0.75mm2, 90mm 48 x 48 x 21 mm 70 g 70 g 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm 62 g 62 g 90 x 105 x 65 mm 375 g 363 g Connection PSB-10-12 (PSB-10-24) AC 110-250 V 50 Hz/ 60 Hz N L PS-10-12 (PS-10-24) AC 184-253 V 50 Hz/ 60 Hz N L PS-30-12 (PS-30-24) AC 100 - 250 V 50 Hz/ 60 Hz N L T 1A AC AC DC + - DC 12 V / 0.84A (DC 24 V / 0.42A) 48 AC - DC 12 V / 0.84A (DC 24 V / 0.42A) AC 100 - 250 V 50 Hz/ 60 Hz N L T 2A DC + PS-30-R DC + - AC 184-253 V 50 Hz/ 60 Hz N L T 3.15A T 2A AC AC DC 12 V / 2.5A (DC 24 V / 1.25A) PS-100-12 (PS-100-24) DC DC + - DC 12 V - 24 V / 2.5 -1.25A + - DC 12 V / 8.4A (DC 24 V / 4.2A) Power supplies PS Connection PSB-10-12 NOVINKA PSB-10-12 / PSB-10-24 designated for installation into an installation box. Suitable for controlling of lighting sources, thermo valves, shutter engines, etc. Neutral Output voltage Phase Output voltage PS-10-12 PS-30-12 Supply terminals Supply terminals L N L N Output voltage indication Output voltage indication - + Output voltage terminals Output voltage terminals + + + Output voltage terminals - - \ - Output voltage terminals PS-30-R PS-100-12 Output voltage terminals Supply terminals N - - - - Supply terminals N L L Output Indication voltage of over-load indication Setting output voltage Output voltage terminals + + + + + + - - - - - - Output voltage Output voltage terminals + + + \ - - - Output voltage terminals terminals 49 Power supplies DR ! Stabilized switching power supply ! Input voltage (Uprim) in a wide range 100 - 240 V AC ! DR-60-12: power supply with fixed output voltage DC 12 V, stabilized 54 W ! DR-60-24: power supply with fixed output voltage DC 24 V, stabilized 60 W ! Max. load 12 V-4.5 A, 24 V-2.5 A ! Electronic protection of short-circuit, over-loading, over-voltage, fine setting of output voltage by trimmer in a range ±10% EAN code DR-60-12V: 8595188125048 DR-60-24V: 8595188125055 ! LED power indicator light, viewable from the front panel ! Ambient air cooled through the perforated housing ! 4.5-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, isulation class II Technical parameters: Input (U prim) Voltage range: Supply voltage tolerance: Consumption without load (max): Consumption with full load (max): Output (Usec) Output voltage: Max.load: Output voltage-no load DC: Wave of output voltage: Efficiency: Tolerance of output voltage: Electronic fuse: Fine adjustment of output voltage: Overloud protection: Time delay after connection: Other information Working humidity: Thermal coeficient: Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength (prim/sec): Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Symbol 88-264 V AC/ 47-63 Hz nebo 124-370 V DC in the range of supply voltage 3VA AC 65 VA AC 70 VA 12V ±10% 4.5A / 54W 12V ±10% 0.12V 83.5% 24V ±10% 2.5A / 60W 24V ±10% 0.15V 86% ±1 % electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage ±10 % - trimrem to 105-160 % of rated output 100 ms for 100% loading and AC 230 V 20 - 90 % RH 0.03 % /°C (0 to 50 °C)/ 0.03 % /°F (32 °F to 122 °F) -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) -40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F) / (10 - 95% RH ) 3 kV IP20 device/ IP40 in-built in distribution board solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 10) 78 x 93x 56 mm (3.1˝ x 3.7˝ x 2.2˝) 300 g (10.6 oz.) EN 61010-1, EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-17 Description Terminal supply voltage Uprim Input voltage terminals U DC + + Trimmer for fine setting of output voltage ±10% 50 N L AC DC + - Connection DR-60-12 DR-60-24 Uprim supply voltage U DC Output voltage DC 12 V/4.5 A DC 24 V/ 2.5 A AC 100-240 V DC 124-270 V NL ++ trimmer for fine setting of output voltage ±10% Power supply ZSR-30, ZNP-10 Regulated stabilized power supply ZSR-30 Supply of various devices and appliances by safe voltage with fully galvanic separation from the main. ! Input voltage: AC 230 V ! Output voltage: DC 5-24 V stab., DC 24 V unstab. and AC 24 V ! Exceeded current limit values is indicated by LED flashing ! When there is full short-circuit, output is disconnected, output current is limited by an electronic fuse ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! Nonstabilized power supply ZNP-10-12V, ZNP-10-24V AC and DC output voltage: 12 V or 24 V, nonstabilized ! Power supply with fixed output voltage ! Protection against short-circuit and overload by a safety fuse ! Input voltage: AC 230 V ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! EAN code ZNP-10-12V: 8594030332733 ZNP-10- 24V: 8594030334089 ZSR-30: 8594030331750 Technical parameters Entry (U prim) Voltage range: Supply voltage tolerance: Consumption without load (max): Consumption with load (max): Output (Usec) Output voltage: Output voltage-no load AC: Output voltage-no load DC: Fuse: Wave of output voltage: Efficiency: Tolerance of output voltage: Electronic fuse: Other information: Operating temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strenght (prim/sec): Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ZSR-30 6VA 10VA ZNP-10-24V ZNP-10-12V AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz -15 %; +10 % 7 VA 11 VA Connection 6.5 VA ZSR -30 PRI DC 5-24V stab. DC 24V nonstab. AC 24V 32V 44V 300 mV 75 % ±5 % T100 mA/250 V DC 24 V nonstab. AC 24 V 32 V 44 V DC 12 V nonstab. AC 12 V 17 V 22 V primary wind T100 mA max.4 V AC AC DC REG DC + - max.3 V SEC x x x Towards black-out and and current overloading АС 230 V 50 Hz / 60 Hz + REG DC - ZNP-10 -20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F) -20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F) 4 kV IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 390 g (13.8 oz.) 360 g (13.8 oz.) 360 g (13.8 oz.) EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-1. EN 61558-1 PRI АС 230 V 50 Hz / 60 Hz T100 mA/250 V AC DC + SEC DC + DC WARNING! Values of max. load are valid for (operational) temperature. Total loads on all output terminals may not exceed this values: by supplying 230 V-253 V – 8W from 230 V…207 V output power is proportionately decreesing onto 5 W Description ZSR-30 Input voltage terminals ZNP-10-12V ZNP-10-24V Input voltage terminals Output voltage indication AC output voltage AC output voltage DC nonstabilized output voltage DC output regulated voltage DC unregulated output voltage 51 Bell transformers ZTR ! Designated for general use – e.g. as home bells supply, door locks supply ! Input voltage: AC 230 V ! Short-circuit-proof, doubled output terminals ! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ZTR-8-8: output voltage 8 V ZTR-8-12: output voltage 12 V ! EAN code ZTR-8-8V : 8595188136808 ZTR-8-12V: 8595188136815 ZTR-15-12V: 8595188139281 Technical parameters Entry (U prim) Voltage range: Supply voltage tolerance: Consumption without load (max): Output (Usec) Output voltage: Output voltage-no load AC: Max.loability: Fuse: Other information: Operating temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strenght (prim/sec): Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 52 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ZTR-15-12: output voltage 4 - 8 -12V ZTR-8-8 ZTR-8-12 ZTR-15-12 Connection AC 230 V / 50 Hz -15 %; +10 % 7.2 VA AC 8 V 12 V 8 VA 9.4 VA AC 12 V 16 V 8 VA short-circ.resistant ZTR-8-8 ± 10 % 3.5 VA AC 4 V AC 8 V AC 12 V 16 V 4V 5VA - 8V 10VA - 12 V 15VA 8V 3 230V ~ 50 Hz 1 N EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-8, EN 61558-2-1 L 2 ZTR-8-12 12V 3 -20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F) -20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F) 3.75 kV IP20/40 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝) 350 g (12.3 oz.) 314 g (11.1 oz.) 312 g (11 oz.) 4 4 230V ~ 50 Hz 1 N L ZTR-15-12 2 Twilight switches SOU 62x34x98 IP65 SOU-2 SOU-1 Accessories of twilight switches: SOU-3 Twilight switch with digital time clock. Voltage range: AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz Output conatct: 1x changeover /SPDT 8 A. Twilight switch. Voltage range: AC 230 V a AC/DC 12-240 V Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A. Twilight and light switch Voltage range: AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz Output conatct: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A. Photosensor SKS Protection degree: IP56. It is suitable for mounting on the wall or in panel. Memory relays MR MR-41 MR-42 Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A. Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V Output contact: 2x changeover / SPDT 16 A. Control and signalling devices USS SWITCHES, PUSH BUTTONS SWITCHES WITH GLOW LAMP USS designated for switching, controlling and signalling by auxiliary any power circuits. SIGNALLING LIGHT BLIND FLANGE 53 Twilight switch SOU-1 Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall EAN codes: SOU-1 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188121002 SOU-1 /UNI + photosensor SKS: 8595188121019 Photosensor SKS: 8594030337288 54 It serves to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity ! Used for switching street illumination and garden lights, illumination of advertisements, shop windows, etc. ! Level of ambient intensity is monitored by an external sensor and output is switched according to set level on the device ! Control input for additional control, e.g. time switch, preswitch etc. ! Level of illumination adjustable in two ranges: 1 - 100 Lx and 100 - 50000 Lx ! Adjustable time delay to eliminate short term fluctuation in illumination ! External sensor IP56 suitable for mounting on the wall (cover and holder of a sensor are a part of the package) ! Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V ! Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A ! Red LED output indication ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting SOU-1 230 UNI Technical parameters Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Power input (apparent/loss): Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Time delay: Time delay setting: Illumination rang 1): Illumination rang 2): Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Control Power the control input: Load between S-A2: Control. terminals: Glow tubes connetions: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Impulse length: Reset time: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Sensor cable length: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions of the sensor: Weight of sensor: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Mounting of photosensor SKS into the panel ! A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W -15 %; +10 % green LED 0 - 2 min potentiometer 1 - 100 Lx 100 - 50000 Lx Symbol Connection L A1 16 N 18 A1 S A2 IN IN IN S A2 15 15 16 18 Function Description of DIP switch 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 IN ambient light intensity DIP 1 - LUX ON 100 - 50000 Lx 1 - 100 Lx LEVEL Hysteresis A1-A2 DIP 2 - TEST ON Lx ТЕSТ S 15-18 ТЕSТ ON NORMAL t t Description 0.8 - 530 mVA (UNI), 0.8 - 530 mVA (AC 230 V) Yes(UNI, AC 230 V) A1-S AC 230 V - Yes / UNI - No 230 V - max. amount 20 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited 150 ms -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals max. 50 m (standard wire) III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 10) see page 133 20 g (0.7 oz.) 90x17.6x64 mm (UNI) - 75 g (2.6 oz.), (230) - 65 g (2.3 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 Supply voltage terminals Terminals for sensor A1 S A2 IN IN Terminal of blocking input Output indication Supply voltage indication Switch of test function TEST Setting of level of illumination Fine setting of level of illumination Setting time delay 15 16 18 Output contact Twilight switch SOU-2 with digital time switch clock innovation! Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall ! It serves for control of lights on the basis of ambient light intensity and real time (combination of SOU-1 A1 A2 T1 T1 and time switch clock SHT-1 in one device) 15 16 18 EAN code SOU-2 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188130523 photosensor SKS: 8594030337288 SOU-2 : 85957888121644 Technical parameters Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Back-up supply: Typ záložní baterie: Summer/winter time: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Switching voltage: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Time circuit Power back-up: Accuracy: Minimum interval: Data stored for: Program circuit Illumination range: Program place number: Program period: Data readout: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Dimensions of the sensor: Weight: Weight sensor: Standards: ! Time clock can override the light sensor for applications when lights are not required ! Adjustable light intensity 1-50000 lx ! Function „random switching“ enables simulation of presence in a house when nobody is at home ! Switching: according to a program (AUTO) / permanently manual / random (CUBE) ! External sensor IP56 issuitable for mounting on the wall/ in panel ( cover and sensors are part of delivery) ! easy replacement of backup battery with plug-in module located on front panelof device (no disassembly required) ! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting Mounting of photosensor SKS into the panel SOU-2 A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz max. 4 VA -15 %; +10 % yes CR 2032 (3V) automatic Symbol Connection external sensor A1 3 years max. ±1 s day (23 °C/ 73.4 °F ) 1 min min. 10 years 1-50000 Lx 100 daily, weekly LCD display, illuminated by back up -10 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 1.4˝ x 2.5˝) see page 119 110 g (3.9 oz.) 20 g (0.7 oz.) EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1, EN 60255-6 18 16 A1 A2 T1 T1 T1 T1 A2 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2) 8 A / AC1 2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC 250 V AC1 / 30 V DC 1x107 1x105 Un 15 15 16 18 Description of visual elements on the display Displaying the day Status indication Auto + t Prog Operation mode indication Man Displays 12/24 hour mode Indication of the switching program Display of date / the lighting setup menu Time display Control button ESC Control button PRG / + Reset Control button OK Control button MAN1 / - Description Sensor-Terminal Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2) A1 A2 T1 T1 Auto Backlight display OK MAN RESET PRG + Controlling buttons ESC _ Lead-sealing point Plug-in module: 15 16 18 Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery Output - Channel 1(15-16-18) with battery backup without battery backup 55 Twilight switch SOU-3 ! It serves as control of the device on the basis of ambient light intensity ! External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall, front cover removable without screws 98x62x34 IP65 ! Built in high resolution light sensor ! Two devices in one, function is set by jumper: - twilight switch – contact closes by decreasing of ambient light intensity, and opens by its increasing - light switch – contact closes by increasing ambient light intensity, and opens by decreasing light intensity. Used for switching of devices by reaching of pre-set ambient light level, usually sun shine(pulling down the shutters or blinds, activation of solar panels) adjustable (by jumper) ranges of light level ! 3 adjustable levels of time delay (for elimination of short-term fl uctuations of light intensity – for short increases in light intensity) ! Supply voltage 230 V AC ! Potential-free output contact 12A/AC1 switching EAN code SOU-3 /230V: 8595188140560 Technical parameters Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Tolerance of voltage range: Input (apparent/loss): Setting the scale level of lighting: Function (twilight switch) - range 1: - range 2: - range 3: Function (light switch) - range 1: - range 2: - range 3: Setting function Level of light-slight: Slight setting of light level: Time delay t: Delay setting t: Output Output contact: Current rating: Switching output: Peak current: Switched voltage: Min.switching output: Mechanical life: Electrical life: Other information: Operation temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strengh: Operation position: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution level: Max. cable size (mm2): Suggested power-supply cable: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: SOU-3 L-N AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz - 15% .. +10% max 6VA / 0.7W by jumper J2 Description (proportion is accordant to real size) Cable gommet M16x1.5 for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4” Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2” 1 ... 10 Lx 10 ... 100 Lx 100 ... 1.000 Lx 100 ... 1 000 Lx 1 000 ... 10 000 Lx 10 000 ... 100 000 Lx by jumper J3 0.1 ... 1 x range potenciometer 0 / 1 min. / 2 min. by jumper J1 SOU-3 L N L 15 18 J1 Delay (min) 1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO2) 12 A / AC1 3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC / 24 V DC 500 mW 3 x 107 0.7 x 105 J2 Adjustable range setting (Lx) 10 100 1.000 0 1 2 J3 Function light switch twilight switch 1.000 10.000 100.000 Slight setup finish in the frame of range -30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down or on the sides IP65 III. 2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12) CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5) 98 x 62 x 34 mm (3.9˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝) 122 g ( 4.3 oz.) EN 60255-6, 61010-1 Hole for mounting on the wall Ø4.3mm/ 0.2” Sensor of ambient light Connection L N L N potentialless NO contacts jumper for L potential L 15 18 Function Actual illumination level Setup illumination level Solid hysteresis 12% L N 3- wiring connection L-N Function twilight switch 15 - 18 Function light switch 15 - 18 56 t t t t t Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection). For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting. L 15 18 L N 4- wiring connection Memory & latching relays MR-41, MR-42 EAN code MR-41 /230V MR-41 /UNI MR-42 /230V MR-42 /UNI 8595188115889 8595188115896 8595188115902 8595188115919 Technical parameters Number of functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Voltage range: Consumption (apparent/loss): Supply voltage tolerance: Supply indication: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Controlling Consumption of input: Load between A2-ON/OFF: Control. terminals: Glow tubes connetions: Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input: Impulse length: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting/DIN rail: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Latching relays, controlled by buttons from several locations can replace three way switches or cross bar switches thanks to control by buttons (unlimited number, connected in parallel by 2 wires), installation gets more transparent and faster for mounting ! Relay MR-41/UNI, MR-42/UNI memorize its last state even after supply failure. During the failure relay will turn off and after re-energizing will automatically turns on. ! MR-41 - output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A ! MR-42 - options - 2x parallel contacts or the other relay is latching - function selected via external jumper between B1 - B2 - output contact: 2x changeover /SPDT 16 A ! Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V ! 1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, controlling by buttons MR-42 MR-41 2 A1 - A2 AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) AC 0.17 - 3 VA / DC 0.1 - 1.2 W AC 0.17 - 12 VA / DC 0.11 - 1.9 W AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC max. 12 VA / 1.2 W AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W -15 %; +10 % green LED Symbol 1 MR-42 MR-41 12 A1 14 11 ON/OFF A2 12 A1 14 11 ON/OFF A2 22 24 21 1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO2) 2x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / <3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x10 7 0.7x10 5 Connection MR-41 L N L N + A1 + A1 ON OFF A2 B1 AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V) Yes A1 - ON/OFF Yes 230V - max. amount 5 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g (UNI) - 89 g, (230) - 85 g EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1 MR-42 ON OFF A2 B2 21 22 24 11 12 14 11 12 14 Function MR-41 A1 - A2 ON/OFF 11 - 14 MR-42 A1 - A2 ON/OFF 11 - 14 B1 B2 B1 B2 21 - 24 11 - 14 21 - 24 57 Controlling and signalling modules USS ! Independent switch units designed for flexible controlling and switching of power circuits ! USS - “Do It Yourself” = it is possible to “click into” different types of switches and signalling units into the basic module ! Units are delivered as components and configured by the user ! 15 types of units: switches, push buttons, signal lights of different colours including flashing lights units are replaceable also for future (for example when an application is changed, extended, etc...) ! It is possible to place up to two units into one MODULE (for example 2x switch, 2x signalling lights or combinations) = saves space in switchboard panels ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! Operating temperature -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) ! M3 screw with clamp terminals Units A3 (A13) USS-02 A3 (A13) USS-03 A3 (A13) USS-04 A3 (A13) A3 (A13) A1 (A12) A1 (A12) A2 (A11) A1 (A12) A2 (A11) A1 (A12) 6A / 250 V AC Switch 8 A / 250 V AC Alternation switch 6 A / 250 V AC Switch with cental position 6 A / 250 V AC Switch + button with central position A1 (A12) 6 A / 250 V AC Switching button with central position 8 A / 250 V AC NO switch A3 USS-06/R(A13) A1 (A12) 8 A / 250 V AC NC switch A3 (A13) A1 (A12) 10 A / 250 V AC Switch with glow lamp (red) 10 A / 250 V AC Switch with glow lamp (green) 10 A / 250 V AC Switch with glow lamp (yellow) A2 (A11) A3 (A13) A1 (A12) A2 (A11) A3 (A13) A1 (A12) A2 (A11) A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (red) A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V A1 (A11) A3 (A13) A2 (A12) USS-11 A1 (A11) A3 (A13) A2 (A12) USS-12 A1 (A11) A3 (A13) A2 (A12) USS-13 A1 (A11) A3 (A13) A2 (A12) A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (white) A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V A1 (A11) A3 (A13) A2 (A12) A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED flashing (red) A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V A1 (A11) A3 (A13) A2 (A12) A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (blue) A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V USS-14 USS-15 58 A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (green) A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V A1 SWITCHES, PUSH BUTTONS They have a low uplift and a large fingerboard. High quality contacts, easy rock switch and large button area provide years of useful life. Unit: 01-06 SWITCHES WITH GLOW LAMP Switch and signalization in one unit. Signalization is carried out by a glow lamp in dolly including series resistance. It is possible to instal it for permanent indication or for an intermittend by contact of the switch. Colours: red, green, yellow. Supply voltage of the signalling light: AC 250 V. A2 (A11) A1 (A12) USS-10 A3 USS - ZM + USS - 07 + USS - 11 A2 A2 (A11) A3 USS-06/S(A13) USS-09 Example of an order: USS-01 USS-08 BLIND FLANGE Used to fill in an empty position in the front panel of the USS Module Color: Grey, RAL7035 (the same as the housing). Unit: 00 Blind flange USS-00 USS-07 8595188124577 8595188124614 8595188124621 8595188124638 8595188124645 8595188124652 8595188124669 8595188124676 8595188136372 8595188124683 8595188124690 8595188124706 8595188124331 8595188124348 8595188124355 8595188124362 8595188124898 8595188124379 Make your own device USS - easy and intelligent solution! RATED CURRENT/VOLTAGE FOR SWITCHES SUPPLY CONNECTION INDICATION VOLTAGE FOR SIGNALLING DESCRIPTION LIGHTS Basic MODULE (housing with terminals USS-ZM MODUL and contacts) USS-05 EAN code USS-ZM USS-00 USS-01 USS-02 USS-03 USS-04 USS-05 USS-06/S USS-06/R USS-07 USS-08 USS-09 USS-10 USS-11 USS-12 USS-13 USS-14 USS-15 SIGNALLING LIGHT High luminescence SMD/LED that illuminates the entire button area surface. Input voltage can be either AC 230 V or AC/ DC 24 V (output light may vary). Red sig. light is delivered also in a flashing version.Unit: 14. Colours: red, green, yellow, white, blue Unit: 10-15 Terminal connection A3 Max. number of symbols: 8 4 A12 A13 Dimensions See page 117-121 APEM A 13 UL Switches and buttons are marked by laser according to your request in case you order 50 pcs and more. A2 A11 A 11 Laser marking A1 A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (yellow) A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V A 12 4 8 Monitoring relays Voltage Current V AC HRN-33(HRN-63) Supply and monitored voltage in range AC 48-276 V, 1x output for Umax and Umin adjustable level. HRN-35 as HRN-33 but individual output for each level ( Umax/Umin). Adjustable time delay to eliminate voltage peaks. Power factor c o s - Frequency Hz Hz 3 phase 1 phase AC/DC Level A AC HRN-41 (Hysteresis) HRN-55 Monitoring DC and AC voltage 10-500 V, divided into 3 inputs and 3 ranges, 2 independent outputs 16 A, 2x time delay. HRN-55N AC/ DC supply from all phases supply L1-N (monitors also disconnection of neutral wire) Time delay to eliminate peaks. HRN-42 (Window) HRN-57 as HRN-41 but function WINDOW. Other functions (applicable for HRN-41): faulty state memory, hysteresis, galv. separated supply AC 230, 400, or AC/DC 24 V. HRN-57N supply from all phases PRI-32 PRI-41 (Hysteresis) monitoring by current transformer (wire through an opening, galv. separated, without heat loss), adjust. current 1-20A, multivoltage AC 24-240 and DC 24V, output 8A changeover. 3 inputs (0,4-1,6, 1,25-5, 4-16A) divided into 3 ranges (selectable by a switch). HRH-5 Replacemat for HRH-2, simple version , 2 functions, galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 V AC/DC HRF-10 COS-1 monitors and scores power factor (phase shift between current and voltage cos φ) in 3phase/1phase circuits (motors, pumps etc.). for monitoring the frequency of AC voltage. The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch. supply L1-N (monitos also neutral wire disconnection) Adjustable voltage level. HRN-37 (HRN-67) as HRN-33(63), but in voltage range AC 24-150 V. HRN-34(HRN-64) HRN-54 as HRN-33(63) but in voltage range DC 6-30 V for monitoring battery circuits ( 6,12,24 V). HRN-54N supply from all phases supply L1-N (monitors also disconection of neutral wire).All parameters adjustable by potentiometers. PRI-51 HRN-56 adjustable level Umin HRN-56/120 monitoring of current by in-built transformer, 5 ranges (in versions 1/2/5/8/16A), range 5A is suitable for current transformer (X/5), supply and output as PRI-32, difference from PRI-32: direct monitoring and finer ranges (higher sensitivity) = higher accuracy in measuring. PRI-42 (Window) as PRI-41 but function “WINDOW”. HRH-1 4 functions, advanced setting for various combinations, galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V, 2 output contacts/2PDT 16A. HRN-56/208 HRN-56/240 HRN-56/400 HRN-56/480 HRN-56/575 PRI-52 For scanning the current up to 25 A. Long distance device diagnostics (black-out, increasement of take-off ) Priority relay Supplying voltage AC 230 V Output 8A/ SPST switching over HRH-6 HRH-6/S Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes. Supply voltage: 12-24 V DC or galvanically separated 230 V AC. Additional signalization to HRH-6 with 6 control lights on the front panel of device. Level switches accessories: HRN-43 HRN-43N galvanically separated supply AC 230V, AC 400 or AC/DC 24V, memory, adjustable hysteresis and delay, 2 x independent output. Level sensors SHR PRI-53 MPS-1 Optical signaling of three-phase network. for monitoring the current in three-phase devices. Power supply: 24-240 V AC/DC, galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current 2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A) HRH-4 a set of level relay HRH-5 and a contactor VS425. For automatic operation 1-phase and 3-phase pumps. 2 function. IP55. SHR-1(M, N) - for monitoring flooding SHR-2- for level detection SHR-3 - for demanding and industrial environment 59 Monitoring relays review Relays monitor voltage 62 HRN-35 1-M from monitored 1 AC 48 - 276 V 62 from monitored 1 AC 230V AC 110V AC 400V AC/DC 24V 3 HRN-43N/230V HRN-43N/110V HRN-43N/400V HRN-43N/24V 3-M AC 230V AC-110V AC 400V AC/DC 24V 3 HRN-55 1-M HRN-55N 1-M HRN-56/120 HRN-56/208 HRN-56/240 HRN-56/400 1-M HRN-56/480 HRN-56/575 3-M AC 3 x 172 - 287 V 3 AC 3 x 300 - 500 V 3 3 from monitored 3 from monitored 2 output relays, functions of the second relay may be selected (independent/parallel) Galvanically separated power supply 68 3 from monitored AC 3 x 48 - 276 V 3 AC 3 x 172 - 287 V AC 3 x 300 - 500 V AC 3 x 172 - 287 V AC 3 x 72 - 160 V AC 3 x 125 - 276 V AC 3 x 144 - 276 V AC 3 x 240 - 460 V AC 3 x 228 - 550 V AC 3 x 345 - 660 V Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption, replacement for HRN-52 If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will immediately disconnects with no delay Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will immediately disconnects with no delay Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption 60 Type HRH-1/230V HRH-1/110V HRH-1/400V HRH-1/24V 3-M from monitored AC 3 x 50 - 253 V HRH-4/230V HRH-4/24V 64 65 May be used for scanning the current from the external current transformer - up to 600A 73 Monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value Monitors exceeding the preset value 74 Setting Description Set AC 230 V AC/DC 24 V HRH-5 1-M AC/DC 24-240 V HRH-6/AC HRH-6/DC box IP65 AC 230 V AC/DC 12-24V * Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer. Galvanically separated power supply 78 Unit with no protection devices - adequate protection element needs to be integrated before the unit. Ingress protection of the assembly is IP55 82 Measuring the frequency of 10 Hz will protect liquid from polarisation and measuring probes from increased oxidation Galvanically separated power supply 77 * devices mainly designated for monitoring water level in fire-engine tanks 80 Relay for factor cos- monitoring 65 66 Type 66 Monitoring values COS-1/230V COS-1/110V COS-1/400V COS-1/24V 3-M AC 230V AC 110V AC 400V AC/DC 24V Monitoring values Setting 3 Description 0.1 - 0.99 Two output relays, one independent relay for each level Galvanically separated power supply 84 67 Thanks to the power supply from all three phases, the relay is operational even if one phase fails Relay for frequency monitoring 67 HRF-10 3 Type 1-M AC 3 x 0.4 - 1.2 A AC 3 x 2 - 6 A AC 230 V AC 110 V AC 400 V AC/DC 24 V 64 Signal relays MPS-1 Level switches 68 from monitored from monitored Second relay function (independent/parallel) Galvanically separated power supply from measuring inputs AC 3 x 84 - 480 V 3 3 61 from monitored 1-M 1-M HRN-54N HRN-57N 1-M AC 3 x 300 - 500 V from monitored HRN-54 3 1-M AC/DC 24-240 V 61 from monitored HRN-57 6-M Page 3-M PRI-53/1 PRI-53/5 AC 0.5 - 25 A 72 Page HRN-43/230V HRN-43/110V HRN-43/400V HRN-43/24V AC/DC 10 - 50 V 32 - 160 V 100 - 500 V 1 May be used for scanning the current from the current transformer - up to 600A Power supply is galvanically separated from the measured current Optical signaling of three-phase network 70 3-M AC 161 - 346V Monitoring values 1 40 - 60 Hz 48 - 72 Hz 320 - 480 Hz Setting Description Page 1 AC 230 V Memory Errors AC 230V AC 110V AC 400V AC/DC 24V 1-M Frekvence < 3-M PRI-52 Function HRN-42/230V HRN-42/110V HRN-42/400V HRN-42/24V 62 Hysteresis AC/DC 10 - 50 V 32 - 160 V 100 - 500 V Frekvence > 1 75 The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for every level Galvanically separated power supply Delay AC 230V AC 110V AC 400V AC/DC 24V 62 Hysteresis 3-M 75 The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for every level Galvanically separated power supply Sensitivity Probe HRN-41/230V HRN-41/110V HRN-41/400V HRN-41/24V < cos φ AC 24 - 150 V 62 > cos φ 1 71 Delay from monitored Delay 1-M AC 0.05 - 0.5 A AC 0.1 - 1 A AC 0.2 - 2 A AC 0.5 - 5 A AC 0.8 - 8 A AC 1.6 - 16 A Exceeding the current value - the current flowing through the monitored conductor must not exceed 100 A even on a short-term basis Frekvence < HRN-67 1 Level min. DC 6 - 30 V AC 24-240 V DC 24 V Frekvence > 1 1-M Level max. from monitored PRI-51/0.5 PRI-51/1 PRI-51/2 PRI-51/5 PRI-51/8 PRI-51/16 62 cos φ range 1-M AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A Frequency Range HRN-64 1 Phases AC 48 - 276 V AC 230 V AC/DC 24 V Phases 1 3-M Supply voltage from monitored PRI-42/230V PRI-42/24V Supply voltage 1-M AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A Supply voltage HRN-63 1 Design AC 24 - 150 V AC 230 V AC/DC 24 V Design 1-M 3-M Design HRN-37 For all types, the delay is adjustable from 0 - 10 seconds (to eliminate short-term outages or peaks) The lower voltage level (Umin) is set in % of the upper level (Umax) PRI-41/230V PRI-41/24V Page DC 6 - 30 V AC 1-20 A <I 1 1 >I from monitored AC 24-240 V DC 24 V Description Memory Errors 1-M 1-M Hysteresis HRN-34 PRI-32 Delay 62 <I Type Setting >I Rozsah Phases AC 48 - 276 V Page 1 Monitoring values Design Memory Errors Hysteresis from monitored Delay <U Asymmetry >U 1-M Failure Phases HRN-33 Range Voltage Description Design Type Nastavení Phase sequence Secure variables Supply voltage Relay for current monitor Switchable ranges of rated frequency 85 Monitoring voltage relay HRN-41, HRN-42 ! Monitoring DC / AC 1-phase in 3 ranges ! Monitoring voltage with 2 independent levels (overvoltage / undervoltage) ! Two versions, HRN-41: Function “HYSTERESIS” a HRN-42: Function “WINDOW” ! “MEMORY” function - manual reset key on frontal panel ! function of second relay (independent/parallel) ! Adjustable delay for short peaks EAN code HRN-41 /110V HRN-41 /230V HRN-41 /400V HRN-41 /24V HRN-42 /110V HRN-42 /230V HRN-42 /24V ! Galvanically separated supply voltage 8595188140430 8595188140409 8595188121521 8595188140416 8595188140478 8594030337653 8594030338070 Technical parameters Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Measuring Ranges: Terminals: Input resistance: Max. permanent overload: Peak overload <1ms: Time delay for Umax: Time delay for Umin: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mechanical): Repeat accuracy: Dependance on temperature: Tolerance of limit values: Hysteresis (from fault to normal): Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Output contact: 1x changeover/SDPT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for all monitored levels ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting HRN-41 HRN-42 A1 - A2 AC 110 V, AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA -15 %; +10 % Description Measured voltage AC or DC MEMORY function Function of 2nd relay (1st-paralel, 2nd-independent) Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal state Supply indication Adjusting upper level - Umax Indication Umax 10 - 50 V (AC 50Hz) 32 - 160 V (AC 50Hz) 100 - 500 V (AC 50Hz) C - B3 C - B2 C - B1 1.1 MΩ 360 kΩ 110 kΩ 600 V 300 V 100 V 1 kVV 700 V 250 V adjustable, 0 -10 s adjustable, 0 -10 s 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5% selectable 5 % / 10 % 2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW yellow LED 3x107 0.7x105 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 239 g (8.4 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 t1 - time delay for Umax Output indication t2 - time delay for Umin Indication Umin Adjusting bottom level - Umin Symbol Connection Uin100-500 32-160 Un 10-50 A1 C B1 B2 B3 16 18 26 28 A1 A2 C ~~ A2 15 B1 B2 B3 25 16 15 18 28 25 26 Function Un Umax Uin Umin Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis 15-18 25-28 15-18 25-28 RESET LED > U LED < U LED MEMORY-ON (DIP2) Relay is delivered in two versions – according to the way of setting and monitoring voltage levels. HRN-41 has function Hysteresiss, which means that only upper level is set ( Umax) and lower level (Umin) is set in % from upper level. Therefore lower level automatically changes when changing upper level. HRN-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that upper level (Umax) and lower level (Umin) are set independently in % from rated monitores range. Both types have choice of function MEMORY, in case the relay gets into a faulty state it keeps output in this state until it is reset by button RESET. DIP switch No.3 can be used to choose if relays should switch individually for each level or in parallel in case any level of voltage is overrun. DIP switch No.4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when going from normal state to a faulty one. Relay has protection against polarity reversing for DC voltage or incorrectly chosen AC-DC voltage (this fault is indicated by flasching of both LEDs ( LED <U a LED >U). 61 Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x It serves to control supply voltage for appliances sensitive to supply tolerance, protection of the device against under/over voltage HRN-3x is band voltage relay, HRN-6x is over/under voltage relay. For difference - see graph of function HRN-33, HRN-63 - monitors voltage in range AC 48 - 276 V - U max and U min can be monitored independently HRN-34, HRN-64 - like HRN-33, but voltage range is DC 6 - 30 V - monitoring of battery circuits (12, 24 V) HRN-35 - like HRN-33, but independent output relays for each voltage level - switching of other loads possible HRN-37, HRN-67 - like HRN-33, monitors voltage in range AC 24 -150 V - it is possible to monitor level of overvoltage and undervoltage independently ! Adjustable time delay for all types is 0 - 10 s (to eliminate short voltage drops or peaks) ! Voltage Umin adjusted as % of Umax ! 3-state indication - LEDs indicating normal state and 2 fault states ! Supply from monitored voltage (monitors level of its own supply) ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! ! EAN code HRN-33 HRN-34 HRN-35 HRN-37 HRN-63 HRN-64 HRN-67 8595188115636 8595188115643 8595188115650 8595188130615 8595188130622 8595188130639 8595188130646 Technical parameters Supply and measuring Terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Upper level (Umax): Bottom level (Umin): Max. permanent: Peak overload <1ms: Time delay: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mechanical): Repeat accuracy: Dependance on temperature: Tolerance of limit values: Hysteresis (from fault to normal): Output - Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: HRN-33/ HRN-63 HRN-34/ HRN-64 HRN-35 A1 - A2 AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz AC max. 1.2 VA AC 160 - 276 V 30 - 95 % Umax AC 276 V AC 290 V A1 - A2 DC 6 - 30 V DC max. 1.2 VA DC 18 - 30 V 35 - 95 % Umax DC 36 V DC 50 V A1 - A2 AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz AC max. 1.2 VA AC 160 - 276 V 30 - 95 % Umax AC 276 V AC 290 V HRN-37/ HRN-67 A1 - A2 AC 24-150 V / 50Hz AC max. 1.2 VA AC 80-150 V 30 - 95 % Umax AC 276 V AC 290 V adjustable 0 - 10 s 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5% 2 - 6 % of adjusted value (only HRN-33, HRN-34, HRN-35, HRN-37) 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x chang. for each level of voltage,(AgNi) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red/ green LED 3x107 0.7x105 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 73 g (2.6 oz.) 85 g (3 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 61 g (2.2 oz.) Symbol 61 g (2.2 oz.) Connection Un Un Un - + HRN-33, HRN-37. HRN-63, HRN-67 A1 HRN-34, HRN-64 16 18 A1 HRN-33, HRN-37. HRN-63, HRN-67 HRN-35 16 18 A1 16 18 26 A1 A2 HRN-34, HRN-64 A1 A2 HRN-35 A1 A2 28 25 26 28 15 16 18 A2 62 15 A2 15 A2 15 25 15 16 18 15 16 18 Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x Indication LED HRN-34 HRN-33, HRN-37 HRN-35 HRN-64 HRN-63, HRN-67 Normal state Umin<Un<Umax Green LED = ON Red LED = OFF Normal state Umin<Un<Umax Green LED = ON Red LED = OFF Exceeded Umax(overvoltage) Un>Umax Green LED = ON Red LED = ON Exceeded Umax(overvoltage) Drop below Umin(undervoltage) Un>Umax or Un<Umax Green LED = ON Red LED = ON Exceeded Umax(overvoltage) Drop below Umin(undervoltage) Un>Umax or Un<Umax Green LED = OFF Red LED = ON Drop below Umin(undervoltage) Un<Umin Green LED = ON Red LED = OFF Normal state Umin<Un<Umax Green LED = ON Red LED = OFF Exceeded Umax(overvoltage) Un>Umax Green LED = ON Red LED = ON Drop below Umin(undervoltage) Un<Umin Green LED = OFF Red LED = ON Exceeded Umax(overvoltage) Un>Umax Green LED = OFF Red LED = ON Drop below Umin(undervoltage) Un<Umin Green LED = ON Red LED = OFF Description HRN-33, HRN-37 HRN-63, HRN-67 Supply/monitoring voltage A1 Supply/monitoring voltage HRN-35 A1 A2 A2 Indication Indication Adjusting of upper value Umax Adjusting of delay Adjusting of upper value Umax Adjusting of delay Adjusting of bottom value Umin Adjusting of bottom value Umin 25 15 16 15 18 Output contact 16 26 28 Output contact for Umin 18 Output contact for Umax Function HRN-33, 34, 35, 37 (band voltage relay) HRN-34 HRN-33,HRN-37 Hysteresis Monitoring relay series HRN-3x monitors level of voltage in single - phase circuits. Monitored voltage serves also as supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent (all occurrences) levels of voltage, when exceeded the output is activated. HRN-33 and HRN-34 - in normal state the output relay is Hysteresis permanently switched. It switches off when there is a limit settings. This combination of linkage of the output relay is advantageous when the full failure of supply (monitored) voltage is considered to be a faulty state in the same way as a decrease of voltage within the set level. Output relay is in both situations always switched off . Differently HRN-35 version uses indipendent relay for each level, in normal state it is switched off. If the upper level is exceeded (for example overvoltage) 1 relay switches on, when the bottom level (e.g. Legend: undervoltage) is exceeded 2 relay switches. It is thus possible to see the particular faulty state. To eliminate short peaks in the main the time delay, which is possible to be set in range 0 - 10 s, is Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage used. It functions when changing from normal to faulty state and prevents unavailing pulsation of Un - measured voltage Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage the output relay caused by parasitive peaks. Time delay doesn´t apply when changing from faulty 15-18 - switching contact of output relay No.1 to normal state, but hysteresis (1-6% depends on the voltage setting) apply. Thanks to changeover 25-28 - switching contact of output relay No. 2 contacts it is possible to get other confi gurations and functions according to actual requirements of the application. LED ≥ Un - indication green Hysteresis Hysteresis > HRN-35 Hysteresis Hysteresis LED U > - indication red Function HRN-63, 64, 67 (over/under voltage relay) HRN-63, 64, 67 Monitoring relay line HRN-6x serves to monitor levels of voltage in single-phase or DC circuits. Monitored voltage is in the same time also supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent levels Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage of voltage. When Umax is exceeded, output is activated. In case voltage level falls below Umin, output is deactivated. This combination is advantageous when full absence of supply voltage is understood as Un - measured voltage Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage faulty state. as well as voltage drop in the frames of set level. To eliminate short voltage peaks in the 15-18 - switching contact of output relay main there is time delay which can be set in a range of 0-10 sec. Such delay applies in case of going LED U> - indication red LED from overvoltage to undervoltage. In case of returning from undervoltage to overvoltage this delay doesn’t apply. Thanks to changeover output contacts it is possible to reach various configurations and functions according to requirements or an application. Legend: 63 R elay for monitoring phase seq uence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N ! Replacement for HRN-51 and HRN -51N ! Relay monitors phase sequence and failure, exceeding of monitored voltage in 3 phase main ! HRN-55 - supply from all phases, which means that function of relay is applicable also if one phase fails ! HRN-55N - supply L1-N, it means that relay also monitors break of neutral point ! Fixed delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable delay T2 (0.1-10s) ! Faulty state is indicated by LED and output contact of relay is OFF. ! Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code HRN-55 8595188137225 HRN-55N 8595188137232 Technical parameters Monitoring terminals: Supply terminals: Voltage: Level Umax: Level Umin: Burden: Hysteresis: Max. permanent: Peak overload <1ms: Time delay T1: Time delay T2: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: HRN-55 HRN-55N L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 3x400 V / 50 Hz Description L1, L2, L3,N L1, N 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz L1 L3 L2 Indication 125 % Un 75% Un max. 2 VA 5% AC 3x460 V AC 3x500 V Supply/monitoring terminals Adjusting of time delay T2 AC 3x265 V AC 3x288 V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC 10 A 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 1x107 1x105 16 Symbol Connection HRN-55 HRN-55 L1 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 67 g (2.36 oz.) 66 g (2.3 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 18 15 Output contact 3~ 16 HRN-55N 18 U L2 L3 15 L1 L2 HRN-55N L1 N 3~ 16 15 15 Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and failure of any phase. Green LED is permanently ON and indicates presence of power supply voltage. In case of phase failure or exceeding voltage level red LED flashes and relay breaks. When changing to faulty state, time delay applies. Time delay setting is set by a potentiometer on front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (OFF lower level)relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED. Function HRN-55: thanks to supply form all phases, this relay is able to stay operational also if one phase is out. HRN-55N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitor also failure in neutral wire. 64 Umax Umin UOFF L1 Umax Umin UOFF L2 Umax Umin UOFF L3 15-18 green LED red LED L3 15 18 Hysteresis Function description N L2 16 16 L3 L1 18 U L2 L3 Hysteresis 18 R elay for monitoring over/under voltage in 3 -phase mains HRN-57, HRN-57N EAN code HRN-57 8595188137256 HRN-57N 8595188137249 Technical parameters Monitoring terminals: Supply terminals: Voltage: Level Umax: Level Umin: Burden: Hysteresis: Max. permanent overload: Peak overload <1ms: Time delay T1: Time delay T2: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: HRN-57 ! It serves to monitor voltage in a switchboard, protection of devices in 3-phase main ! It monitors value of voltage in 3-phase main ! It is possible to set upper and lower level independently ! Adjustable time delay eliminated short voltage peaks and failures in the main ! The device is supplied from monitored voltage ! Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by breaking output relay contact ! Output contact 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1 ! Relay doesn’t monitor phase sequence ! HRN-57 – supply from all phases, means that relay is functional also in case of failure in one phase ! HRN-57N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire, replacement for HRN-52 ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting HRN-57N L1, L2, L3,N L1, N 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz 105 - 125 % Un 75 - 95 % Un max. 2 VA 5% AC 3x460V AC 3x265V AC 3x500V AC 3x288V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s Description L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 3x400 V / 50 Hz 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC 10 A 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 1x107 1x105 Supply / monitoring terminals L1 L2 L3 Indication Supply indication Adjusting upper value Umax Adjusting of time delay T2 Adjusting bottom value Umin 16 15 18 Output contact Symbol Connection HRN-57 HRN-57 L1 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 68 g (2.4 oz.) 66 g (2.3 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 N 3~ 16 HRN-57N 18 U L2 L3 15 L1 L2 HRN-57N L1 N 3~ 16 N L3 16 16 15 15 L3 L1 L2 18 U L2 L3 15 18 18 Function Hysteresis Function description Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g. undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the set levels, output relay breaks and red LED shines (LED indicates faulty state – flashes when timing) In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level) relay immediately breaks without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED. In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped. Umax Umin UOFF L1 Umax Umin UOFF L2 Umax Umin UOFF L3 Hysteresis 15-18 green LED red LED 65 R elay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase seq uence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N EAN code HRN-54 8595188137201 HRN-54N 8595188137218 Technical parameters Supply and measuring Supply terminals: Supply/measured voltage: Level Umax: Level Umin: Burden: Hysteresis: Max. permanent overload: Peak overload <1ms: Time delay T1: Time delay T2: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Indication of state: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: HRN-54 ! It serves to monitor voltage, phase failure and sequence in switchboards, protection of devices in 3-phase mains ! It is possible to set upper and lower level of monitoring voltage ! Adjustable time delay eliminates short voltage peaks and failures in the main ! Supply is done from monitored voltage ! Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by opening of output relay contact ! Output contact 1x changeover / SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1 ! In case supply voltage falls below 60 %Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens without delay ! HRN-54 –supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case when one phase is faulty ! HRN-54N –supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting HRN-54N L1, L2, L3,N L1, N 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz 105-125 % Un 75-95 % Un max. 2 VA 5% AC 3x460 V AC 3x265 V AC 3x500 V AC 3x288 V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s Description L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 3x400 V / 50 Hz 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC 10 A 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 1x107 1x105 Supply/monitoring terminals L1 L2 L3 Supply indication Output indication Adjusting upper value Umax Adjusting of time delay T2 Adjusting bottom value Umin 16 18 15 Output contact Symbol Connection HRN-54 HRN-54 L1 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 69 g 67 g EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 N 3~ 16 HRN-54N 18 U L2 L3 15 L1 HRN-54N L2 L1 N 3~ 16 L3 Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g. undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the set levels, output relay opens and red LED shines ( LED indicates faulty state – flashes when timing). In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level)relay immediately opens without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED. In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped. U 16 16 L2 L3 15 15 15 18 Function Umax Umin UOFF L1 Umax Umin UOFF L2 Umax Umin UOFF L3 15-18 green LED red LED 66 N L3 18 Hysteresis Function description L1 L2 Hysteresis 18 R elay for monitoring phase seq uence and failure HRN-56 ! Relay monitors phase sequence and failure (e.g. control of correct motor winding etc.) ! Relay is designated for monitoring of 3-phase mains ! Supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case of one phase failure ! Supply and monitored supply Un: 1-MODULE HRN-56/208 - 3x120V HRN-56/208 - 3x208 V HRN-56/240 - 3x240 V HRN-56/400 - 3x400 V Technical parameters Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Fixed time delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable time delay T2 (0 -10s) ! Faulty state is indicated by LED and by opening of output relay contact ! Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A /250V AC1 ! 1-MODULE, 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting 208 240 EAN code HRN-56 /120V HRN-56 /208V HRN-56 /240V HRN-56 /400V HRN-56 /480V HRN-56 /575V 8595188130745 8595188130134 8595188130141 8595188130158 8595188130189 8595188130196 Description HRN-56 120 Monitoring terminals: Supply terminals: Supply/measured voltage: Level Umin: Level Uoff : Burden: Hysteresis: Max. permanent overload: Peak overload <1s: Time delay T1: Time delay T2: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Indication of state: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: 3-MODULE HRN-56/480 - 3x480 V HRN-56/575 - 3x575 V 400 480 575 L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 3 x 120V/50Hz 3 x 208V/50Hz 3 x 240V/50Hz 3 x 400V/50Hz 3 x 480V/50Hz 3 x 575V/50Hz adjustable 70 - 95 % Un 60 % Un max. 2 VA 5% AC 3 x 160V AC 3 x 276V AC 3 x 460V AC 3 x 550V AC 3 x 660V AC 3 x 180V AC 3 x 300V AC 3 x 500V AC 3 x 600V AC 3 x 700V max. 500 ms adjustable 0 -10 s 1-MODULE Supply terminal L1 L2 L3 Indication Adjusting value Umin Adjusting of time delay 16 15 18 Output contacts 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC 10 A 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC red LED 1x107 1x105 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 66 g 66 g 66 g 67 g EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 3-MODULE front panel Indication Adjusting value Umin Adjusting of time delay Symbol L1 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x1.5 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 108 g 108 g Connection 16 18 L1 L2 3~ L1 L2 L3 L3 U L3 L2 15 16 15 18 16 16 15 15 18 18 Function Hysteresis Function description Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and phase failure. Green LED shines permanently and indicates energization. In case of phase failure red LED flashes and relay turns off. When changing to faulty state, time delay applies – delay setting is done by potentiometer on the front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence, red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicate by red LED. HRN-56: Thanks to supply from all phases, relay is functional also in case of one phase failure. Umin UOFF L1 UOFF L2 UOFF L3 t1 t2 15-18 green LED red LED 67 R elay for complete monitoring 3 -phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N ! Monitoring 3-phase mains: - voltage in 2 levels (undervoltage and overvoltage) in range 138-276V or 280-480 V (3x400 V) - phase asymmetry - phase sequence - phase failure ! Function “MEMORY” - for return from the faulty into normal state press button „RESET“ located on the front panel ! HRN-43 - for circuits 3x400 V (without neutral) ! HRN-43N - for circuits 3x400/230 V (with neutral) EAN code HRN-43 /230V HRN-43 /400V ** HRN-43 /24V ** HRN-43N /230V HRN-43N /400V HRN-43N /24V ! 2 output relays, selectable function of 2nd relay (independent / parallel) 8594030337660 8595188121316 8594030338087 8594030338216 8595188120258 8594030338094 Technical parameters Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Measuring circuit Nominal voltage: Terminals: Upper level Umax: Bottom level Umin: Max. permanent overload: Hysteresis: Asymmetry: Peak overload <1ms: Time delay t1: Time delay t2: Accuracy Set. accuracy (mechanical): Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependance: Limit values tolerance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Fixed (t1) and adjustable (t2) ! Galvanically delay to eliminate short voltage drops and peaks separated supply voltage AC 400 V, AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V ! Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting HRN-43 HRN-43N A1 - A2 AC 230 V, AC 400 V, AC/DC 24 V / (AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA -15 %; +10 % 3x400V / 50Hz L1. L2. L3 240–480V 3x400V / 230V / 50Hz L1. L2. L3, N 138–276V 35 - 99 % Umax 3x480 V adjustable 5 % or 10 % of set value 5 - 20 % 600 < 1ms 350V < 1ms fixed, max. 200 ms adjustable 0-10 s Description Selection of function MEMORY Function of 2. relay (1.-paralel, 2.-independent) Supply voltage Indication overvoltage/ undervoltage, failure -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 239 g (8.4 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 Time pause t2 Umax adjusting Sequence indication Asymmetry indication Asymmetry 5-20 % setting Umin adjusting Symbol 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5% 2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW 3x107 0.7x105 Hysteresis from faulty to normal state HRN-43 HRN-43N A1 L1 L2 L3 3~ 16 18 26 A2 A1 L1 L2 L3 N U 15 3~ A2 25 HRN-43N HRN-43 L1 L2 L3 N Un Un A1 A2 N L1 L2 L3 A1 A2 16 18 26 28 U Connection 16 15 18 28 25 26 68 28 L1 L2 L3 16 15 18 28 25 26 15 25 R elay for complete monitoring 3 -phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N Function Overvoltage - undervoltage Hysteresis Legend: L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time delay, fixed t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec 15-18 output relay 1 25-28 output relay 2 LED U - indication overvoltage / undervoltage Hysteresis Umax Umin L1 x L2 Uma Umin x L3 Uma Umin RESET t1 t2 t1 t1 t2 Selection of 2nd relay function: In order to monitor 2 levels of voltage, it is possible to select if output relay will respond to each level individually (see the diagram) or both relays will switch in parallel way (see diagram “phase sequence”). Selection via DIP switch. 15-18 t1 t2 t1 25-28 LED MEMORY - ON (DIP-2) Phase sequence Legend: L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time delay, fixed t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec 15-18 output relay 1 25-28 output relay 2 LED indication of phase sequence L1 L2 L3 L3 L2 L3 L2 L2 L3 L2 L3 RESET t1 t1 Selection of 2nd relay function: The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence, the relays are switched in parallel way. t1 15-18 (25-28) t1 t1 LED MEMORY - ON (DIP-2) Asymmetry - phase failure L1 L2 L3 Legend: L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time pause, fixed t2 - time pause, adjustable 0-10 sec - adjustable asymmetry 5-20% 15-18 output contact of relay 1 25-28 output contact of relay 2 LED - asymmetry indicator 100% 0% 100% 0% 100% 0% 100% 0% RESET Hysteresis t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 15-18 (25-28) Selection of 2nd relay function: The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence, the relays are switched in parallel way. DIP switch is ignored. LED MEMORY - ON (DIP-2) Function description Relay is designated to monitor 3-phase circuits. Type HRN-43N controls voltage towards neutral wire, type HRN-43 controls interphase voltage. Relay can monitor voltage in two levels (overvoltage/ undervoltage), phase assymetry , sequence and failure. Each faulty state is indicated by individual LED. By DIP switch (No.3) it is possible to define function of the other relay – independent function (1x for overvoltage, 1x for undervoltage) or in parallel. Time delays t1(fixed) – when changing from faulty to normal state or when de-energized and t2 (adjustable) when changing from normal to faulty state. These delays prevent incorrect conduct and oscillation of output device during short voltage peaks in the main or during gradual voltage decline into normal. Voltage control Set upper level Umax in range 138-276 V (or 240 - 480 V for HRN-43) and lower level Umin in range 35-99% Umax. In case any phase passes this range, after a delay which eliminated short voltage peaks, contact opens. Output contact again switches after returning back into monitored voltage range and exceeding fixed hysteresis (which is adjustable in two values by DIP switch). Phase sequence Monitors correctness of phase sequence. In case of unwanted change output contact breaks. In case of energization of a device with incorrect phase sequence, contact stays opened. Asymmetry Rate of assymetry between individual phases is set in a range of 5-20%. In case set asymmetry is exceeded, output relay breaks and LED indicating asymmetry shines. Delays t1, t2 and hysteretic are applicable when returning to normal state. 69 Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Used for optical signaling of the voltage level in three phases Each phase features LED signaling broken down by color into voltage levels: - voltage in tolerance of +/-15% - green - overvoltage - red - undervoltage - yellow - voltage < 50V - LED not illuminated Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N Monitors phase voltages against neutral wire Not dependent upon order of phases Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N In 1-MODUL design, DIN rail mounting EAN code MPS-1 8595188145978 Technical parameters Supply voltage: Supply voltage tolerance: Power consumption: Indication: LED not illuminated: LED illuminated: - yellow - green - red Other information Design: Mounting: Pracovní poloha: Coverage: Overvoltage category: Contamination level: Working temperature: Storage temperature: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: MPS-1 Connection AC 3x400/230V, 50/60Hz +20%, -75% max.1.0VA / 0,5W 0 ... 50V / 45 ... 0V 50 ... 207V / 195,5 ... 45V 207 ... 264,5V / 253 ... 195,5V 264,5 ... 276V / 276 ... 253V 1 module DIN rail EN60715 any Panel IP40, terminals IP10 III. 2 -20 ... +55°C -30 ... +70°C 90x17.6x64mm 58 g EN60947-1, EN60947-5-1 L1 N L2 L3 Description of device Terminal N Terminal L1 Function After connecting the supply voltage, the LED illuminates - the color corresponds to the voltage size of individual phases. If the phase voltage drops under 40V ( phase outage), the corresponding LED is not illuminated. Description of function Terminal L2 L1 N L2 L3 Terminal L3 Indication L1 Indication L2 Indication L3 70 Current monitoring relay PRI-32 ! Current transformer is a part of the product. Inside this transformer there is a wire which senses the volume of flowing current ! This construction reduces thermal stress of product when compared with conventional solutions with inbuilt shunt, and increases current range up to 20 Amps, and galvanically separates monitored circuit ! For heating bars in sliding rails, heating cables, indication of current flow, controlling of 1-phase motor consumption ... ! Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V ! Supply is galvanic separated from measuring current ! Current exceeding – current flowing through monitored wire must not exceed 100 A ! Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A ! Clamp terminals ! 1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code PRI-32 8595188121965 Technical parameters Supply circuit Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring circuit Current range: Current adjustment: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mechanical): Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependancy: Limit values tolerance: Overload capacity: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Output indication: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: PRI-32 Description Supply terminals A1 - A2 AC 24 - 240 V, DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 1.5 VA -15 %; +10 % A1 A2 Output indication Supply indication 1 - 20 A (AC 50 Hz) potentiometer 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5% max.100 A /10 s Controlling cable outlet (max. diameter 6mm) Adjustment of access current 16 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC red LED -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 68 g (2.4 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 15 18 Output contact Symbol Connection Un A1 16 18 A1 A2 A2 15 16 15 18 Function Monitoring relay PRI-32 serves to monitor current level in single phase AC circuits. Due to its fluent adjustment of release current, it is predestined for applications with necessity of current flow indication, and can be used as precedence relay. Output relay is off in normal state. In case the set current level is exceeded, it switches. Multivoltage supply is an advantage. Imax Hysteresis I 15-18 LED Un 71 Current monitoring relay PRI-51 ! It serves for monitoring of heating in rail-switches, heating cables, consumption of one-phase motors, indicates current flow ! Flexible adjustment by potentiometer, choice of 6 ranges: AC 0.05-0.5A; AC 0.1-1A; AC 0.2-2A; AC 0.5-5A; AC 0.8-8A; AC 1.6-16A ! Adjustable delay 0.5 - 10 s to eliminate short current peaks ! It is possible to use for current scanning from current transformer - up to 600 A! ! Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V EAN code PRI-51 /0.5A PRI-51 /1A PRI-51 /2A PRI-51 /5A PRI-51 /8A PRI-51 /16A ! Supply is not galvanically separated from measured current, it must be in the same phase 8595188142885 8595188124904 8595188124911 8595188124928 8595188124935 8595188124942 ! Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A ! 1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, replacement for PRI-31 Technical parameters Supply circuit Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Measuring circuit Load: Current range: Recomended current transformers: Max. permanent current: Inrush overload <1ms: Current adjustment: Time delay: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mechanical): Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependancy: Limit values tolerance: Hysteresis (fault to OK): Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Output indication: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Description PRI-51 Supply terminals A1 - A2 AC 24 - 240 V a DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 1.5 VA -15 %; +10 % Measuring input (only AC) A2 A1 B1 B2 Output Indication Adjusting current in % In Adjusting time pause between B1 - B2 PRI-51/0.5 PRI-51/1 PRI-51/2 PRI-51/5 PRI-51/8 PRI-51/16 AC0.05-0.5A AC0.1-1A AC0.2-2A AC0.5-5A AC0.8-8A AC1.6-16A (AC50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) applicable also for current transformer more information page 87 0.5A 1A 2A 5A 100 A potentiometer adjustable 0.5-10 s 8A 16 A 16 18 15 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5 % (10% for 0.05-0.5A range) 5% 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC green / red LED -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 58 g ( 2 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 Output contact Symbol Connection Example Connection: PRI-51 with current transformer for current range increase A1 A2 16 18 L N Un Un B1 B2 15 Is A1 A2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 B2 15 Current transformer 16 16 18 15 18 Example of an order Always specify all reference name of current relay according to required range, for example PRI-51/5. Function Monitoring relay PRI-51 serves to monitor current level in one-phase AC circuits. Gradual setting of actuating current of monitoring relay enables many different applications. Output relay is in normal state opened. After the set current level is reached, relay closes after the set delay (0.5-10s). When returning from faulty to normal state there is a hystersis (5%). Multi-voltage of this relay is an advantage. It is possible to monitor load which doesn´t have the same supply as monitoring relay PRI-51. Range of PRI-51 can be increased by an external current transformer. 72 Ip Load Hysteresis Current monitoring relay PRI-52 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code PRI-52 8595188136556 ! Technical parameters Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Tolerance of voltage range: Burden (apparent): Burden (loss): Measuring circuit: Current range: Maximal permanent current: Inrush overload <1s: Current adjustment: Time delay: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mechanical): Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependance: Limit values tolerance: Hysteresis: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Switching power: Output indication: Other information Operating temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strengh: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution level: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Relay is designated for: - distant device diagnostic (short circuit, take-off increasing) - preferred (priority) relay – two appliances (boiler and floor heating) operating on one phase, but never run together – prevention against current overload and circuit breaker tripping. Enables to save your main breaker expenses. - current tranzit indicator – informs about heating activation, ceramic hob, ventilator…. - changing over of appliances according to inverter‘s (converter) output by photocell applications NEW – hole for threaded conductor passes through the body of device Part of device is current transformer, which is sensing size of current in threaded conductor Possible to use also for sensing of current up to 600A from external current transformer Slight setting (by potentiometer ) of tripping current – range AC 0.5….25A Slight setting (by potentiometer) of delay – adjustable in range 0.5…..10s Supply voltage AC 230V Output contact 1x changeover /SPDT 8A (AC1) 1-phase version, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals PRI-52 Device describtion A1 - A2 AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz -15 %; +10 % max. 5 VA max. 1.4 W Supply terminals AC 0.5 ... 25A / 50 Hz 25A 100 A potentiometer adjustable 0.5 ... 10 s Supply voltage indication A1 A2 Output indication Hole for threaded conductor (max. Ø 5.8 mm/0.23˝ ) 10 5 20 25 0.5 Adjusting of time delay In 0.5 - 25A 10 % <1 % < 0.2 % / °C 10 % 0.25A 16 18 15 1x changeover /SPDT (AgNi/Silver Alloy) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC red LED -20 °C to +55 °C ( -4 °F to 131 °F ) -30°C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to158°F ) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP40 from front panel / IP10 terminals III. 2 max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 64 g (2.26 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 Adjusting of current in A 15 Output contact Symbol Connection Un Ip Un A1 16 A1 A2 Is 18 A2 I A1 A2 current transformer 15 16 16 15 18 15 18 Connection example: PRI-52 with current transformer for increasing of current range. Functions hysteresis Imax I 15-18 t Monitoring relay PRI-52 serves for monitoring of current level in 1-phase AC circuits. Slight setting of release current level designates this relay for many various applications. Output relay is in normal status switched off. When set current level is overrun, relay get closed after preset delay. By return from error to normal status is used hysteresis. PRI-52 range is possible to increase with external current transformer. Adventage of PRI-52 is that the hole for threaded conductor is located under the level of covering in the switchboard – thanks that, threaded conductor is not accessible for unwanted manipulation. LED I > 73 Three-phase relay PRI-53 ! ! 6 ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code PRI-53/1 8595188142137 PRI-53/5 8595188142144 Technical parameters Supply terminals: Current monitoring terminals: 1st phase: 2nd phase: 3rd phase: Supply voltage: Tolerance of voltage range: Operating AC frequency: Burden: (max): Rated current In: Current level - I: Overload capacity - continuous: - max.3s: Difference: Delay (until failure): Output relay - contact: AC contact capacity: DC contact capacity: Mechanical life: Other information Operating temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strengh (power supply – relay contact): Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution level: Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! ! PRI-53/1 PRI-53/5 A1, A2 Connection Example of connection: PRI - 53 with a current conversion transformer for increasing the current range. I1, I2 I3, I4 I5, I6 24 - 240V AC/DC ± 10% 45 - 65 Hz 3VA / 1.2W AC 1A AC 5A adjustable 40 - 120% In 2A 20A It is intended for monitoring the current in three-phase devices (e.g. cranes, motors, etc.) 24-240 V AC/DC power supply galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current Adjustable current level in % of In: Fixed difference level Adjustable delay level (when exceeding the preset limit) Adjustable function: - UNDER - monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value I - OVER - exceeding the preset value I 2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A) 6-MODULE, DIN rail mounting Output relay with 2 changeover contacts Option of connecting via the current transformers to increase the value of the monitored current by up to 600 A N L1 L2 L3 Un LOAD I1 I2 A1 A2 I3 I4 10A 50A fix 1 % In adjustable 0.5 - 10s 2x schangeover / DPDT (AgNi) gilded 250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA 30V / 8A 3x106 at rated load -20.. +55 °C -30.. +70 °C 4 kV / 1 min. III. 2 IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminal max 2 x 1.5mm2 / 1 x 2.5mm2 90 x 105 x 64 mm 208 g 208 g EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 I5 I6 16 15 18 28 25 26 Device describtion Supply voltage terminals Current monitoring terminals A1 Supply voltage indication I1 A2 I2 I3 I4 PRI-53/1 Indication of exceeding the preset limit Delay setting Current level setting UNDER / OVER function setting 16 15 18 28 25 26 Output contacts I5 I6 Current monitoring terminals Functions After the supply voltage is connected the green LED is on. UNDER function: If the strength of the monitored current in all phases exceeds the preset level I, the relay is triggered and the red LED is off. If the strength of the monitored current drops in any phase below the level I, the relay is disconnected after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED flashes during the delay. If the strength of the monitored current returns above the level I + difference, the relay is triggered without delay and the red LED goes off. OVER function: If the strength of the monitored current is lower in all phases than the preset level I, the relay is disconnected and the red LED is off. If the strength of the monitored current exceeds in any phase the level I, the relay is triggered after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED flashes during the delay. If the strength of the monitored current again drops below the level I - difference, the relay is disconnected without delay and the red LED goes off. 74 Current monitoring relay PRI-41, PRI-42 ! To monitor overloading / discharge ( machine, motor...), load sensing, diagnostics of remote device (interrunption, short circuit, current cunsumption increase...) ! Monitors AC/DC 1-phase current in 3 ranges ! Monitoring adjusted current in 2 independent levels ! PRI-41: “HYSTERESIS” function and PRI-42: “WINDOW” function ! function of 2nd relay (independent/parallel): “MEMORY” function - manual reset. “RESET” button on the frontal panel EAN code PRI-41 /230V PRI-41/24V PRI-42 /230V PRI-42 /24V 8595188140485 8595188140492 8595188140515 8595188140522 Technical parameters Supply circuit Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring circuit Ranges: Terminals: Input resistance: Max. permanent current: Inrush overload <1ms: Time delay for Imax: Time delay for Imin: Accuracy Measuring accuracy: Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependancy: Limit values tolerance: Hysteresis (fault to OK): Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: PRI-41 ! Adjustable time delay for each level ! Galvanically separated supply ! Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for each current level ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting PRI-42 Description MEMORY function Meassured AC or DC A1 - A2 AC 230 V or AC / DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 4.5 VA -15 %; +10 % 4 - 16 A (AC50Hz) C - B1 5 mΩ 16 A 20 A 1.25 - 5 A (AC50Hz) 0.4 - 1.6 A (AC50Hz) C - B3 C - B2 50 mΩ 11 mΩ 1.6 A 5A 2A 6.3 A adjustable 0-10 sec adjustable 0-10 sec 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5% selectable 5 % / 10 % Function of 2nd relay (1st-paralel, 2nd-independent) Supply indication Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal state Indication Imax t1 - time delay for Imax Adjusting upper level - Imax Output indication Indication Imin t2 - time delay for Imin Adjusting bottom level - Imin Symbol Connection I 0.4-1.6 1.25-5 Un 4-16 A1 16 18 26 28 A1 A2 C changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW yellow LED 3x107 0.7x105 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 239 g (8.4 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 B1 B2 B3 C B1 B2 B3 A2 15 25 16 15 18 28 25 26 Function Un Imax I Imin Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis 15-18 25-28 15-18 25-28 RESET LED > I LED < I LED MEMORY-ON (DIP2) Relay is delivered in two versions - according to setting and level monitoring . PRI-41 has function hysteresis, which means that you set only upper level (Imax) and lower level is set in % from upper level. Therefore when upper level is changed, lower level changes automatically. PRI-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that you set upper level (Imax) and lower level (Imin) individually in % of rated monitored range. Both types have selectable function MEMORY. In case the relay gets to faulty state, this function leaves relay in this state until it is reseted by RESET button. DIP switch No. 3 can be used to choose if output relay should switch for each level separatelly, or in parallel in case any current level is exceeded. DIP switch No. 4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when changing from faulty to normal state. Relay is protected against re-poling of DC current, or wrong AC/DC current (this fault is indicated by LED <I a LED >I common flashing). 75 Current transformator SR - for Monitoring current relay PRI ! ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code SR051 SR101 SR151 SR200 SR250 SR300 SR400 SR600 8595188117425 8595188117432 8595188117449 8595188117456 8595188117463 8595188117470 8595188117487 8595188117494 Technical parameters Max. wire diameter: Max. bus-bar profi le: Primary current (A): Accuracy class: 0.5 1 3 Operating temperature: Storage temperature: 76 Accessory to monitoring relay PRI series, for extension of max. controlled current max. cable 35 mm (1 ˝) Max. cable size: - solid conductor: max. 6 mm2 - wire max. 4 mm2 Bus-bar to max. dimension 40x10 mm ( 2 ˝ x 0.4 ˝) Frenquency: 50 - 60 Hz Constant overload capacity: 1.2 x In Output current: 0 - 5 A 1-phase, DIN rail or panel mounting SR051 22 SR101 22 SR151 SR200 SR250 SR300 SR400 SR600 30x10 30x10 40x10 40x10 40x10 300 400 Rated capacity (VA): 600 4 8 8 12 12 15 12 15 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F) 15 22 23 23 - - - 50 100 Rated capacity (VA): 150 2 3 4 6 4 2.5 3.5 5 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F) 7 9 1.25 1.5 200 250 Rated capacity (VA): 8.5 11 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F) 35 35 35 Level switch HRH-5 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code HRH-5 /UNI ! 8595188136396 HRH-5 Technical parameters Functions: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Input: Toleration of voltage range: Measuring circuit Sensitivity ( input resistance): Voltage n electrodes: Current in probes: Time response: Max. capacity of probe cable: Time delay (t): Time delay after switching on (t1): Accuracy Accuracy in setting (mechanical): Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Switching voltage: Switched voltage: Min. switched output DC: Mechanical life (AC1): Electrical life: Other information Operational temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strenght: Operational position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvltage category: Pollution degree: Profile of connecting wires (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Recommended measuring probes: 2 A1 - A2 24... 240 V AC/ DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 2 VA -15 %; +10 % adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ max. AC 3.5 V AC <0.1 mA max. 400 ms 800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ) adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec 1.5 sec ±5% 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy ) 8 A / AC1 2500 VA , 240 W 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW 1x107 1x105 Relay is designed for monitoring levels in wells, basins, reservoirs, tanks.... In one device you can choose the following configurations: - one-level switch of conductive liquids (by connecting H and D) - two-level switch of conductive liquids One-state device monitors one level, two-state device monitors two levels (switches on one level and switches off on another level) Choice of function PUMP UP, PUMP DOWN Adjustable time delay on the output (0.5 - 10s) Sensitivity adjustable by a potentiometer (5-100kΩ) Measuring frequency 10Hz prevents polarization of liquid and raising oxidation of measuring probes Galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 VAC/DC Output contact 1xchangeover/SPDT 8A/250V AC1 In 1-module type, mounting onto a DIN rail Device description Supply voltage terminals Terminals for conection of probes H, D Indication of supply voltage Choice of function Output indication Choice of function Adjustment of delay on output Terminal for connection of probe C Output contacts Connection Monitoring of two levels Monioring of one level Un A1 A2 A1 A2 H D H D 16 C 15 18 max max -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 3.75 kV (supply - sensors) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from font panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 AWG 10 (2.5 mm2) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 72 g (2.5 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg. 83 Symbol A1 16 18 C D H A2 15 Un min Tank with monitored level 16 C 15 18 Tank with monitored level Function Function PUMP UP Function PUMP DOWN Un max level min 15-18 red LED Un max level min t t 15-18 t t red LED Relay is designated for monitoring of levels of conductive liquids with possibility of functions: PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN. To prevent polarization and liquid electrolysis of liquid, and undesirable oxidation of measuring probes, alternating current is used. For measuring use three measuring probes: H- upper level, D- lower level, C - common probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, you can use it as probe C. In case you require monitoring of one level only, it is neccessary to connect inputs H and D and connect them to one probe - in this case sensitivity is lowered by half (2.5... 50kΩ). Probe C can be connected with a protective wire of supply system (PE). To prevent undesirable switching out output contacts by various influences (sediment on probes, humidity...) it is possible to set sensitivity of the device according to conductivity of monitored liguid (corresponding to “resistance” of liquid) range 5 up to 100kΩ. To reduce infuences of undesirable switching of output contacts by liquid gorgle in tanks, it is possible to set delay of output reaction 0.5 - 10s. 77 Level switch HRH-1 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code HRH-1 /230V 8594030337783 HRH-1 /24V 8594030338209 ! ! Technical parameters HRH-1 Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Supply voltage tolerance: Measuring circuit Hysteresis (input - opening): Voltage on electrode: Current in probes: Time reaction: Max. cable capacity: Time delay tD: Time delay tH: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mech.): Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Measuring sensors: 3 A1 - A2 AC 230V, AC/DC 24V (galvanicaly separated) or AC 110V(AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA -15 %; +10 % Used to check the level in wells, reservoirs, tanks, pools, tankers, containers, etc. Within the framework of a single device, the following configurations can be selected (see functions graph): - two separate level switches - two probes in one tank - filling tank from well Single-state monitors one level (full or empty tank), double-state monitors two levels (switches on upon one level and switches off upon the second) DIP switch on front panel is used to choose function (see functions graph): - pumping in - pumping out - over-pumping Option of setting time delay for reacting to the output upon a change in level, any type of delay by DIP switch Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer (probe resistance based on fluid) The measuring frequency 500 Hz prevents fluid polarization and oxidation increase of measured probes Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V or AC 110 V Output contact 2x switches 16 A / 250 V AC1 In 3-MODULE design, fixing to DIN rail in an adjustable range 5 kΩ- 100 kΩ max. AC 5 V AC <1 mA max. 400 ms 4 nF adjustable 0.5 -10 sec adjustable 0.5 -10 sec ±5% 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW 3x107 0.7x105 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with cavern max. 1x1.5 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 240 g (8 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg. 83 Measuring probes There can be any measuring probe (any conductive contact, it is recommended to use brass or stainless steel). The probe wire does not need to be shielded, but it is recommended. When using a shielded wire, the shielding is connected to terminal S. Connection Symbol Un A1 16 18 28 26 C D H S A1 A2 C A2 15 D H S 25 16 15 18 28 25 26 Description Terminal for connection of conductor common for both probes Supply voltage terminals Terminals for connecting probe Terminals for connecting shield A1 A2 C S H D Supply voltage indication DIP Delay setting relay H H relay indication (OUT2) Delay setting relay D D relay indication (OUT1) 16 Output contact of D relay - OUT1 15 18 28 25 26 Sensitivity setting of probe according to resistance of measured fluid Output contact of H relay - OUT2 Description and importance of DIP switches 2 separate tanks change of function of relay D relay D - delayed close relay H - delayed close 78 Level switch HRH-1 Functions Two separate level switches Un Un sonda D probe D LED D LED D OUT1- relay D OUT1- relay D tD tD probe H tD tD probe H LED H LED H OUT2 - relay H tH OUT2 - relay H tH When the tank is empty relay D open, relay H is closed tH tH When the tank is empty both relays are switched Two probes in single tank Un Un probe D probe D probe H probe H LED D LED D OUT1- relay D OUT1- relay D tD tD LED H tD tD tH tH LED H OUT2 - relay H tH OUT2 - relay H tH The relay, which is used to control the level liquids conductive (water, chemical solutions, food, etc.). In this principle, it goes on about the measurement of liquids by measuring probes. As the measuring used signal is 5V AC/ 500Hz. Using an AC signal prevents the the increasing oxidation of probes and unwanted polarization and electrolysis liquid. During depending on the DIP settings configurations, switches can control two independent levels or use a combined function for one level (see diagram of functions). The relay is equipped with regulation of the sensitivity to to liquid resistance. It‘s also possible to eliminate some of the unwanted switching in the sensitivity settings according to specific conditions (for example, pollution probe sediments, humidity, etc.). It‘s also possible for each probe to set the delay in the range of 0.5-10s, and using the DIP switch type delay (when you turn the relay on and off, depending on application). Example of usage: For controlling two independent tanks For controlling the level combination of upper and bottom probe container with the monitored level container with the monitored level 16 15 18 28 25 26 Pump control or other output device D H S Pump control or other output device 16 15 18 28 25 26 probe H A1 A2 C probe D H S common probe C D probe H A1 A2 C Un common probe C common probe C probe D Un container with the monitored level Output relays for pump control or other output devices, Selecting contacts is depending on the selected function Note: As a common probe, it could be used with an advantage such as metal pipes, tanks, etc. Due to the isolation of probes from a supply voltage, and the measured voltage which is up to 5V, it is possible to connect probes using standard communication cables. 79 Level switch HRH-6 Function 1 is monitoring minimal and maximal level depth, for example in fire engine cars, tanks etc. Function 2 is monitoring level depth in water collectors, basins, pools ec. ! Selection of particular function is made by jumper on the front panel ! Level depth is indicated on the panel of device by LED ! Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes (one probe is common) ! Common probe can be replaced by a metal (conductive) tank ! Level indicationby six LED‘ s on the front panel of the device ! It is possible to connect another indication module (e.g. in fire-engine cabin) ! Adjustable sensitivity according to liquid conductvity ! Adjustable time delay - elimination of level movement, e.g. while a tank is being filled up ! Measuring frequency 10 Hz to prevent polarization of liquid ! Supply voltage 12.... 24 V DC (to be used in fire-engines) or galvanically separated 230 VAC for general use ! Contact relay 10A for signalization of full/empty tank (according to a chosen function) ! Choice of functions PUMP UP/OFF/PUMP DOWN by a switch located on the front panel of the device ! Protection degree IP65 ! ! EAN code HRH-6 /AC HRH-6 /DC HRH-6S 8595188136990 8595188137409 8595188137416 Technical parameters HRH-6 / DC HRH-6 / AC 2 Function: Voltage range: Burden: Supply tolerance: Measuring circuit Sensitivityan adjustable range*: 12..24V DC max. 1.8 W +/- 20% Connection of HRH-6 in a block 230V AC/50-60Hz max.3.8 VA -20 %; +10 % min. 10...20kΩ max. 100...150kΩ max. 3V AC 500nF (for min. sensitivity), 50nF (for maximum sensitivity) adjustable 1...10s 6xLED (1x red, 1x yellow, 4x green) 1x NO-SPST (AgNi/ Silver Alloy ) 10A / AC1 2500 VA / AC1, 200 W / DC 16 A / < 3s 250V AC1 / 24V DC 500 mW 3x107 0.7x105 Voltage on probes: Probe cable maximum capacity: Time delay: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Switching voltage: Peak current: Switching voltage: Min. switching capacity DC: Mechanical life (AC1): Electrical life: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: El. strength (supply – probes): Operating position: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Recommended measuring probe: Description of function: -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) x 3.75 kV any IP 65 x III. 2 110x135x72 mm (4.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 2.8˝) 384 g (13.55 oz.) 284 g (13.55 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg.83 SENS. Jumper - function selection +Un L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 C 15 - Un 80 18 Cable for connecting auxiliary signalling Supply cable / relay contact HRH-6/DC 18 15 N Delay setup HRH-6/S Auxiliary signalling HRH-6/S L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 C + LED6 - level L5 indication LED5 - level L4 indication LED4 - level L3 indication LED3 - level L2 indication LED2 - level L1 indication LED1 - supply voltage indication Cable for connecting probes Basic unit connecting L - Sensitivity setup Function switch Connection HRH-6/AC + HRH-6/DC Basic unit * Note: product is in a state of prototype, may be a subject of alternations . HRH-6/DC DELAY LED6 - level L5 indication LED5 - level L4 indication LED4 - level L3 indication LED3 - level L2 indication LED2 - level L1 indication LED1 - supply voltage indication Level switch HRH-6 HRH-6 block connecting L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 C PU SW PD SW PU 15 18 A C 230V * L N N L PD HRH-6/AC C L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 LED4 LED5 LED6 + 6V LED1 LED2 LED3 - Un + Un 15 18 HRH-6/S LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 + 6V LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 *By HRH-6/DC, incoming supply is connected on terminals +Un and - Un. Functions Un L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 FUNKCE 1 FUNCTION 15-18 J1 15-18 FUNKCE 2 FUNCTION J1 NAPOUŠTĚNÍ / PUMP UP VYPOUŠTĚNÍ / PUMP DOWN 15-18 NAPOUŠTĚNÍ / PUMP UP 15-18 VYPOUŠTĚNÍ / PUMP DOWN This device monitors level of a conuctive liquid in a tank by using six single probes or one 6-fold probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, it is possible to use it as a common probe C. This common probe is connected to a pole of supply (for fire-engines it means its body) in case of supply voltage 12...24VDC. In case of supply voltage 230VAC, the circuits are galvanically separated from the main. The device is controlled by a three-position switch PUMP UP/OFF/ PUMP DOWN. After switching into a position PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN, red LED1 shines and then also LED2...LED6 according to liquid level. Output relay has 2 selectable functions. Funtion setting is done by a jumper on basic board of HRH-6. Function 1: ( for use in fire-engines) - jumper is applied. In case of function PUMP UP and level reaching L5, the relay controlling e.g. acustic signalization, permanently closes and indicated full tank. In case of PUMP DOWN function and level dropunder level L3, relay priodically switches and under L2 it switches permanently (indicates almost empty tank). Function 2: (for keeping liquid level) - jumper is not applied. In case of PUMP UP, sensor is switched until liquid reaches level L5. Then relay opens and switches again in case the lliguid level falls under level L1. In case of PUMP DOWN - relay is switched until liquid falls under level L1. Then relay opens and switches again on level L5. To eliminate LED flashing while level gurgle it is possible to delay reaction of probes (set delay 1..10s). According to conductivity of liquid it is possible to set sensitivity of probes (corresponding to “resistance” of liquid). 81 Level set HRH-4 ! In an easy way it automates operations of pumps depending on level ! Control of level in wells, tanks, reservoirs... ! It is delivered as a connected set – easy installation ! Possibility to monitor level of any type of conductive liquid ! It serves for an automatic operation in 1-phased and 3-phased pumps ! Set of level switch HRH-5 and a contactor VS425 ! Function choice – pumping up or down ! Unit requires incoming over-current protection ! Protection degree of the set is IP55 ! There is a possibility of 4 types of probes in a various design (they are not a part of this set, it is possible to deliver) ! Unit is placed in a plastic box with dimensions 160x135x83mm EAN code HRH-4 /230V 8595188117517 HRH-4 /24V 8595188117500 HRH-4 Technical parameters Function: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring circuit Sensitivity ( input resistance): Voltage n electrodes: Current on probes: Time response: Max. capacity of probe cable: Time delay (t): Time delay (t1): Accuracy Setting accuracy (mech): Output Number of contacts: Rated thermal current: Loading in AC3: Mechanical life: Other information Operation temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength (supply-output): Operating position: Protection degree: Pollution degree: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 2 AC/DC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) 7 VA -15 %; +10 % adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ max. AC 3.5 V AC <0.1 mA max. 400 ms 800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ) adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec 1.5 sec protection element HRH-4/230V ±5% 4x switching 25 A 5.5 kW / 400 V 3x106 A1 A2 H D HRH-5 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV, galvanically insulated any IP 55 2 160 x 135 x 83 mm ( 6.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 3.3˝) 834 g (29.4 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 16 C 15 18 VS425-40 230V AC/DC M 230 V control lamp Function description Function Function PUMP UP Un max level min 15-18 t t t t red LED Function PUMP DOWN Un max level min 15-18 red LED 82 Connection 1) PUMP UP - in case the level falls under a lower limit ( sensor D), a relay switches and a pump pumps a liquid up until it reaches an upper limit ( probe H), then a relay opens and a pump stops pumping. When a level reaches a lower limit again, all process is repeated. After the device is energized, relay automatically closes and a pump pumps liquid to upper limit. 2) PUMP DOWN - in case a level reaches over an upper limit, a relay closes and a pump pumps liquid down. In case a level reaches a lower limit, a relay opens and a pump stops pumping. When energized, a relay is in an open state and a pump operates only after an upper limit is exceeded. 3) In case you combine inputs H and D and connect them to one probe, the device will keep only one level (upper and lower limit will become one). In function PUMP UP relay closes in case the level falls under a probe level. A pump pumps liquid up and in case the level reaches a probe level, a relay opens and a pump stops. The level is kept in a small range around the probe. In function PUMP DOWN relays closes in case a level reaches a probe level. A pump pumps down until the level reaches a probe, then relay opens and pump stops. Level switches accessories - Level sensors SHR SHR-1-M: brass sensor SHR-1-N: stainless steel sensor ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! SHR-1-M EAN code SHR-1-M SHR-1-N SHR-1-N ! 8595188110105 8595188111379 ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code SHR-2 wire to SHR-2 Sensor to control flooding Electrode with diametr 4 mm / 0.2” is placed in plastic cover Panel or to holder mounting Conductor is connected to terminal board, shrink bushing for feeder place insulation is a part of device Max. wire profile: 2.5 mm2 (AWG10) Installation: after connecting a wire to the sensor, run the shrink bushing over the wire onto the sensor. Heat the sensor and by shrinking the connection of sensor and wire will be hermetical Weight: 9.7 g (0.3 oz.) Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F) Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ” 8595188111263 8595188129770 ! ! Level probe SHR-2 Detection sensor is electrode, which in connection with switchable device is used for level detection for example in wells,tanks,... To be ued in electric conductive fluids and mechanically polluted fluids with temperature: +1 °C to +80 °C (33.8 °F to 176°F) stainless steel one-pole electrode reside in PVC cover, intended for tank wall mounting or mounting by socket To ensure corret function of the sensor, it is necessary to have the electrode without dirt which could disable the connection of the electrode and fluid and thus lead to malfunction Max. wire profile: 2.5 mm2 (AWG10) Recomended wire ÖLFLON FEP 1x1.0 BK Installation: - conductor wire is connected by feazing of two brass screws to stainless steel electrode - conductor is caulked by bushing Pg7 with protection degree IP68 Weight: 48.6 g / 1.7 oz. Dimensions: max. diameter 21 mm/ 0.8”, lenght 96 mm / 3.8” SHR-2 in open state ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code SHR-3 Level probe SHR-3 Stainless probe to be used into demanding industrial environments, designated for screwing into tank wall or cover The probe is installed in horisontal, vertical or in sidelong position on tank side or in tank cover. Installation is done by soldering or by fixing nut. It is necessary to use 24 mm (1” ) screw. It is necessary to use an adequate torque with regards to a seal and operational overpressure in a tank Sensor has connecting wire - lenght 3 m, which is connected to sensor to scan electrode and sensor bushing connecting wire is double-wire PVC AWG 18 (0.75 mm2) , connection of wires: brown - scan electrode, blue - sensor bushing Connection M18x1.5 screw Protection degree IP 67 Sensor weight without cable: 100 g (3.3 oz.) Operating surroundings: place without the danger of detonation , temperature on screw: max. 95°C / 203 °F Pressure immunity: on 25 °C / 77 °F 4 MPa, on 95°C / 203 °F 1.5 MPa Weight: 239 g (8.4 oz.) Material: bushing and sean electrode: stainless steel W.Nr. 1.4301, insulation insert of electrode: PTFE Internal material: self - extinguishing epoxide resin Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F) Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ” Dimensions 8595188111270 83 Power factor monitoring relay COS-1 ! Relay monitors phase shift between current and voltage - cos-φ in 3-phase and also 1-phase mains for monitoring overload/unloading of motors ! Function “MEMORY” - manual reset - button on front panel ! It is possible to connect current transformer in front of the device. This enables increase of current range ! 2 output relays, independent for each level ! Adjustable delay to eliminate short peak overloading ! Adjustable range and bottom level cos-φ, of power factor between 0.1- 0.99 ! Adjustable delay to eliminate starting of motor ! Selectable hysteresis 5 or 10% ! Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V ! Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting Symbol Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring Voltage set: Terminals: Upper level cos-φ: Bottom level cos-φ: Max. permanent voltage: Current range: Current overloading: Hysteresis: Time delay t1: Time delay t2: Accuracy Accuracy setting (mechanical): Accuracy of repetition: Temperature dependance: Limit values tolerance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Description A1 A1 - A2 AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC/50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA -15 %; +10 % 3x400 V / 50 Hz L1, L2, L3, B1 adjustable 0.1 - 0.99 adjustable 0.1 - 0.99 (input L1, L2, L3) AC 3x460 V 0.1 - 16 A 20 A (<3 sec.) adjustable 5% or 10% adjustable 0.5 - 30 s adjustable 0 - 10 s 5% <1 % < 0.1 % / °C 5% 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 20 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW yellow LED 3x107 0.7x105 16 18 26 28 Sellection of function MEMORY B1 L1 L2 L3 φ A2 15 2nd relay function (1-parallel , 2- independent) 25 Supply voltage Hysteresis from faulty to normal state Time delay t1 for motor starting Upper level - MAX Upper level - max exceeding Output indication Bottom level- min exceeding Time delay t2 for peak elimination Adjusting bottom level - Cos φ MIN Connection P Un Un Un S 3-phase connection Technical parameters A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt 16 15 18 28 25 26 1-phase connection 8595188120906 8595188120265 8595188120272 8594030338131 Supply set 3x400 V Connection with current transformer EAN code COS-1 /230V COS-1 /110V COS-1 /400V COS-1 /24V ! A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt 16 15 18 28 25 26 A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt 16 15 18 28 25 26 Function L1-L2-L3 MAX Hystereze Hysteresis -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 240 g (8 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 COS φ Hystereze Hysteresis MIN RESET t1 t2 t2 t1 t1 15-18 t2 t1 25-28 LED φ LED φ LED MEMORY ON (DIP-2) After the device is switched on, the yellow LED flashes for time t1 and both relays are switched (state OK). This delay serves to eliminate a faulty state e.g. motor start-up. If the upper limit is exceeded (cosφ - max) red LED shines > cosφ . After a time delay t2 the output relay opens (15-18). Equally, if it falls under bottom limit (cosφ - min) red LED shines < cosφ and after a time delay t2 the output relay opens (25-28). In case the load is disconnected (no current), red LED shines >cosφ (cosφ = 1). 84 Freq uency monitoring relay HRF-10 ! 3 The relay serves to monitor frequency of AC voltage, e.g. in photovoltaic power stations, generators The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch ! Supply from monitored voltage ! Two adjustable levels of frequency (Fmin, Fmax) in the range of 80 - 120% Fn ! Adjustable difference level ! Adjustable delay level ! Switchable ranges of rated frequency Fn ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting EAN code HRF - 10 8595188144827 8144827 Device description Technical parameters HRF-10 Supply and monitoring terminals: Supply voltage: Rated frequency Fn: Burden: (max): Overload capacity: - continuous: - max.10s: Frequency Fmax: Frequency Fmin: Difference: Delay (until failure): Opening level (Uopen): Output relay - contact: AC contact capacity: DC contact capacity: Mechanical life : Other information Operational temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strenght: (napájení - kontakt relØ): Protection degree: Overvltage category: Pollution degree: Profile of connecting wires (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: L, N 161 - 346V 50 / 60 / 400 Hz 1.7VA / 1.1W 346V 416V adjustable 80 - 120 %Fn adjustable 80 - 120 % Fn adjustable 0.5 - 5 % Fn adjustable 0.5 - 10 s 161V 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi) gilded 250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA 30V / 8A 3x106 at rated load -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV / 1 min. III. 2 IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminals max. 2 x 1.5mm2 / 1 x 2.5mm2 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 125 g (4.4 oz.) EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 Supply/monitored voltage terminals L N Supply voltage indication Delay setting HRF-10 Difference setting Indication F > Fmax Fmax setting Fn setting Indication F <Fmin Fmin setting 16 15 18 28 25 26 Output contacts Functions Rated frequency setting Fn setting = 50Hz Fn setting = 60Hz Fn setting = 400Hz Connection L N N L 16 15 18 28 25 26 After the supply (monitored) voltage is connected the green LED is on. If the value of the monitored frequency falls within the range between the two set levels Fmin - Fmax no red LED is on. The relay UNDER is triggered (contacts 15-16-18) and the relay OVER is disconnected (contacts 25-26-28). If the monitored frequency exceeds the set level Fmax, the relay OVER is triggered after the set delay timing elapses and the red LED OVER goes on. The red LED flashes during the timing. If the monitored frequency drops below Fmax - difference, the relay is activated without delay and the red LED OVER goes off. If the monitored frequency drops below the set level Fmin, the relay UNDER is disconnected after the set delay timing elapses and the red LED UNDER goes on. The red LED flashes during the timing. If the monitored frequency exceeds the level Fmin + the difference, the relay is triggered without delay and the red LED UNDER goes off. If the monitored voltage is lower than the opening level Uopen both the relays are disconnected and both the red LED (UNDER and OVER) start flashing slowly - indicating insufficient supply voltage. 85 Thermostats and hygrostats Analog TER single thermostats TER-3A TER-3B -30 to +10 °C (-22 °F to 50 °F) external NTC. 0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) external NTC. TER-3D TER-3C 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) external NTC. +30 °C to +70 °C (86 °F to 158 °F) external NTC. TER-3H -15 °C to +45 °C (5 °F to 113 °F) external NTC. TER-3E 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) external NTC. TER-3G TER-3F 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) in-built NTC. TER-4 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) external PT100. TER-7 Monitoring heating of motor winding in range given by resistance of in-built PTC thermistor(1.8-3.3 kΩ), additional function (memory, reset), output contact 2x8A changeover/ SPDT, supply: AC/ DC 24-240 V. Wide and accurate range of setting -40 °C to +110 °C (-40 °F to 230 °F) in ten ranges in one device, fine temperature setting. 2 inputs for NTC senzor, 2 outputs 16 A changeover/ SPDT, additional function (memory, hysteresis, indication of faulty sensor). Supply: AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (galv. separated ). Thermo ATR ATF Analog room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +400 °C (+41 °F to +104 °F) night decline, flush mounted in to wiring box. ATC Analog floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to +122 °F) „temporary temperature change“ in range ±10 °C/ 50 °F. Combined thermostat with room and floor sensor, temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to +122 °F). TEV TEV-1 TEV-2 Thermostat with„dead zone“, independent adjustable range -20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), protection against freezing, water-proof type IP65. Digital TER TEV-3 Thermostat for regulation of heating (cooling), adjustable range -20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), externí sensor NTC, external sensor NTC, output contact 16A changeover/SPDT. Thermostat for regulation of heating (cooling), adjustable range +5 to +35 °C (41°F to 149 °F), external sensor NTC, output contact 16 A, control potentiometer and indication on panel. Single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…) Temperature range: -30 °C to +60 °C / -30 °C to 140 °F Hygro-thermostat TER-9 Digital multifunction thermostat 2 temperature inputs, 2 outputs 8A changeover/ SPDT, 6 functions, in-built time switch clock, LCD with back light, galvanically sep.supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 24V, 2 MODUL. Temperature range: -40 °C to +110 °C / -40 °C to 230 °F RHT-1 Hygrostat 62x34x153 IP65 Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to + 60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90% RHV-1 Hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH Thermo DTR Digital room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to +122 °F) with in-built (internal) sensor. Intelligent regulation. ATV-1 Energy-saving digital thermostat for radiators, with temperature range +8..+28°C. DTF DTC Digital floor thermostat with temperature range +5 ..+50 °C with external sensor, 16 A potential-free contact. Digital combined thermostat with room and floor sensor with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to +122 °F), pre-programmed programs Accessories to thermostats: TC, TZ , PT-100 - external temperature sensors for thermostats in lengths 3m, 6m,12m -TC/TZ: thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C PT: element PT-100 (only TER-3G) 86 TEV-4 62x34x153 IP65 LKM-45 Wiring box for thermostat mounting on a surface. Thermostats and hygrostats Sensor # TER-3B 1M-DIN # # NTC # TER-3C 1M-DIN # # NTC # TER-3D 1M-DIN # # NTC # TER-3E 1M-DIN # # NTC # 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) 1 °C (34 °F ) TER-3F 1M-DIN # NTC # TER-3G 1M-DIN # # PT100 # TER-3H 1M-DIN # # NTC # TER-4 3M-DIN # #(2x) NTC TER-7 1M-DIN # # PTC TER-9 2M-DIN #(2x) NTC # TEV-1 IP65 box # # INTC # TEV-2 IP65 box # # NTC # TEV-3 IP65 box # # NTC # TEV-4 IP65 box # NTC # # # ATR ELEGANT # ATF ELEGANT # ATC ELEGANT # DTR ELEGANT # # DTF ELEGANT # DTC ELEGANT RHT-1 1M-DIN RHV-1 IP65 ATV-1 valve # NTC # # NTC # # # NTC # NTC # # NTC # # # # NTC # # # built -in # # built -in # # built -in # # # -30 °C to +10 °C 0.5 - 5 °C (-22 °F to 50 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) 0 °C to +40 °C 0.5 - 5 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) +30 °C to +70 °C 0.5 - 5 °C (86 °F to 158 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) 0.5 - 5 °C 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) Designation NTC Relative humidity Hysteresis Temperature range Galv. separated # AC 24V Type # AC 230V External 1M-DIN In-built Analog TER-3A Digital DESIGN AC/DC 24 ..240V Supply Type Type single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor for temperature in cooling and against freezing 88 single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor for sensing room and operational temperature 88 single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor 88 for sensing temperature in devices (overheating...) single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor 88 for sensing operational temperature of machines and devices as TER-3D but with fixed hysteresis 88 -15 °C to +45 °C 1 °C/ 34 °F (5 °F to 113 °F) 0.5 - 5 °C 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) -15 °C to +45 °C 0.5 - 5 °C (5 °F to 113 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) single thermostat into a switchboard with in-built sensor, monitors operational temperature in a switchboard 88 as TER-3D but with input for sensor PT100 89 as TER-3A but with a different temperature range - for cooling and heating 89 -40 °C to +110 °C 0.5 - 2.5 °C (-40 °F to 230 °F) (32.9 °F to 37 °F) Resistance # x 1.8-3.3 kΩ -40 °C to +110 °C 0.5 - 5 °C # (-40 °F to 230 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F) two-state thermostat (2 inputs, 2 outputs), two independent or dependent thermostats, accurate setting, wide temperature range 90 thermistor relay for protection of motor overheating, input designated for sensor PTC in-built in motor winding 91 multifunction( 6thermo functions) digital thermostat with in-built time switch clock, 2 inputs/2 outputs 92 -20 to +20 °C 1.5 °C (35 °F ) ( -4 °F to +68 °F) thermostat with “dead zone” , control of heating and protection against freezing, box for outdoor use with 98 -20 to +20 °C 1.5 °C(35 °F ) ( -4 °F to +68 °F) +5 to +35 °C 1.5 °C(35 °F ) (41°F to 149 °F) single thermostat for regulation of heating, short sensor is a part of this device, protection degree IP65 97 as TEV-2 but potentiometer and indication are placed on front panel 97 -30 °C to +65 °C 0.5 / 1.5 / 4 0C (-22 °F to 149 °F) 32.9/ 35/39 °F single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation +5 to +40 °C 1 °C (34 °F ) ( +41 °F to +104 °F) +5 to +50 °C 1 °C (34 °F ) ( +41 °F to +122 °F) +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) 1 °C (34 °F ) 0.5 -1°C +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) (32.9 °F to 34 °F) 0.5 -1 °C +5 to +50 °C room analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box 94 floor analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box 94 room and floor (combined) analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box 94 room digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box 95 floor digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box 95 room and floor ( combined) digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box 95 # ( +41 °F to +122 °F) (32.9 °F to 34 °F) +5 to +50 °C 0.5 -1 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) (32.9 °F to 34 °F) # 0 to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) H-4% T- 2.5 °C of temperature in demanding enviroments hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and H-4% regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) T- 2.5 °C(36.5 °F) and relative humidity in range 50.. 90% 0 ... 30 % RH hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring -30 °C to +60 °C 30 ... 60 % RH and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH (-22 °F to 140 °F) 2%, 3%, 4% 60 ... 90 % RH +8..+28 °C thermostatic direction valves, temperature regulation +8..+28°C 99 100 101 96 87 Thermostats line TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H) ! Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) in six ranges ! It can be used for monitoring temperature e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, liquids, radiators, motors, devices, open spaces, etc. EAN code TER-3A TER-3B TER-3C TER-3D TER-3G TER-3H 8595188138390 8595188138406 8595188138413 8595188138420 8595188138451 8595188138468 Technical parameters: ! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring ! Possibility to set function “heating”/”cooling” ( setting is done by DIP switch) ! Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity) , switching by potentiometer in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F ! Choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´) ! It is possible to place sensor directly on terminal block – for temperature monitoring in a switchboard or in its surroundings ! Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24 -240 V, not galvanically separated ! Output contact 1x NO - SPST 16 A /250 V AC1 ! Red LED indicates status of output, green LED indicates energization of the device ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting TER-3 Function: single level Supply terminals: A1-A2 Voltage range: AC/DC 24 - 240V (galvanically unseparated) (AC 50-60Hz) Burden: 2 VA Operating range: - 15 %; + 10 % Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: T1 - T1 TER - 3A -30 °C to +10 °C (-22 °F to 50 °F) Temperature range: TER - 3B 0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) (according to product type sensitivity) TER - 3C +30 °C to +70 °C (86 °F to 158 °F) TER - 3D 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) TER - 3G 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) TER - 3H -15 °C to +45 °C (5 °F to 113 °F) Hysteresis: Sensor: Sensor fault indication: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mech.): Switching difference: Temperature dependance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ajustable in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F external, termistor NTC , except for TER-3G (PT100) flashing red LED 5% 0.5 °C / 32.9 °F < 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F) 1x NO (AgSnO2) 16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC 4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 2.5 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 73 g (2.6 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Symbol Connection 18 A1 sensor T1 T1 Un A2 15 Function A1 A2 T1 T1 15 18 Un TEMPERATURE Hysteresis HEATING 15-18 LED COOLING 15-18 LED TEST 15-18 LED ] ] ] ] 15-18 LED COOL RUN HEAT TEST COOL RUN HEAT TEST COOL RUN HEAT TEST short-circuit or sensor disconnection Function description It is a single but practical thermostat with separated sensor for monitoring temperature. Device is placed in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object, or liquid. Supply is not galvanically separated from sensor. Sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of delivered sensor is 12m/ 29.5´. device has in-built indication of sensor damage, which means that in case of short-circuit or disconnection red LED fl ashes. Thanks to adjustable hysteresis, it is advantageous to regulate width of the range and thus define sensitivity of load switching. Sensed temperature is decreased by set. hysteresis. When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor. Description A1 Supply terminals Sensor terminals A2 T1 T1 Output indication Supply voltage indication Heating / cooling selection Function TEST Temperature adjusting Hysteresis adjusting Example of an order Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3A, TER-3B .. or TER-3H) types differ in temperature range and supply voltage. 15 88 18 Output contact Thermostats line TER-3 ( E, F ) ! Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F) ! It can be used for temperature monitoring e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, iquids, radiators, motors, devices, open spaces, etc EAN code TER-3E 8595188138437 TER-3F 8595188138444 Technical parameters: Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: Temperature range: Hysteresis: Sensor: Sensor fault indic. (short-circuit / disconnection): Accuracy Setting accuracy (mech.): Switching difference: Temperature dependance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Fixed hysteresis at 1 °C / 32 °F ! TER-3E - choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´) ! TER-3F - sensor is a part of device, serves for monitoring temperature in a switchboard ! Supply voltage AC /DC 24 - 240 V ! Output contact 1x NO- SPST 16 A / 250 V AC1 ! Output status is indicated by red LED ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting TER-3F TER-3E Symbol Connection single level A1-A2 AC /DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz) 2 VA - 15 %; +10 % external sensor Un 18 A1 T1 T1 - T1 X Un A1 A2 T1 T1 A1 A2 T1 0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F) fixed 1 °C/ 34 °F thermistor NTC in-built A2 TER-3E 15 TER-3F flashing red LED 15 5% 0.5 °C < 0.1 % / °C 1x NO- SPST (AgSnO2) 16A / AC1,10 A / 24 V DC 4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 2.5 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals III. 2 solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4 AWG 12 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 73 g (2.58 oz.) 74 g(2.61 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Example of an order Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3E , TER-3F). 18 15 18 Description A1 A2 T1 Supply voltage terminals External sensor T1 terminal Supply voltage indication Output indication Temperature adjusting Supply voltage terminals A1 A2 Output indication Supply voltage indication Temperature adjusting Sensor 15 18 Output contacts 15 18 Output contacts Function TER-3E, TER-3F TEMPERATURE HYSTERESIS=1K Function description It is a single thermostat for temperature monitoring with separated sensor (except for TER-3F). Device is located in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object or liquid. Supply is not galvanically separated from sensor but sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of sensor cable is 12 m (29.5´). Temperature sensing is decreased by set hysteresis. When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor. 89 2 -stage thermostat TER-4 Two-state thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in a wide range -40 °C to +110 °C (-40 °F to 230 °F) with a switch for temperature ranges shift and fine temperature setting ( high accuracy of setting) ! It can be used for temperature monitoring in e.g. switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, open spaces, objects, liquids, radiators, etc. ! 2 thermo inputs for sensor NTC 12 kΩ/25 °C (77 °F) ! Possibility to choose if both thermostats should work independently or dependently (by DIP switch) ! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring ! Possibility to set functions “heating ” /“cooling ” (setting is done by DIP switch) ! Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity)of switching 0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F) (DIP switch) ! Choice of external thermo sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´) ! It is possible to place the sensor directly on terminal block – to monitor temperature in a switchboard or in its surroundings ! Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V galvanically unseparated ! 2 independent output with changeover contacts/ SPDT 16 A /250 V AC1 ! Output status indicated by red LED, faulty status of sensor by yellow LED ! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! EAN code TER-4 /230V: 8594030337806 TER-4 /24V: 8594030338148 Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Supply voltage tolerance: Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: Temperatue ranges: (set via switch individually for each level) Fine temperature setting: Hysteresis for T1: Hysteresis for T2: Sensor: Sensor failure indication: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mech.): Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Description TER-4 Technical parameters: double thermostat A1-A2 AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated, AC/DC 24V max. 4.5 VA - 15 %; + 10 % Function of thermostat: HEATING/COOLING (inverts output) Adjusting hysteresis for T1 Function: dependent /independent Supply voltage indication Adjusting hysteresis for T2 Output contact-relay 1 T1-T1 a T2-T2 -40 to -25 °C/ -40 to 77 °F -25 to -10 °C/ 77 to 50 °F -10 to +5 °C/ 50 to 41 °F + 5 to+20 °C/ 41 to 70 °F +20 to+35 °C/ 70 to 95 °F +35 to +50 °C/ 95 to 122 °F +50 to +65 °C/122 to 149 °F +65 to +80 °C/149 to 176 °F +80 to +95 °C/176 to 203 °F +95 to +110 °C/203 to 230°F 0-15 °C, in selected range adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch) adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch) termistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F) yellow LED 5% 0.5 °C / 32.9 °F < 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F) 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)16A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A /< 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 - 20.. +55 °C - 30.. +70 °C 4 kV (supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝) 238 g (8.4 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Temperature adjusting T1 Sensor failure Temperature adjusting T2 Output contact-relay 2 Adjusting temperature range Temperature adjusting fine Symbol Connection Un A1 16 18 26 1. sensor 2. sensor 28 A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2 T1 T1 T2 T2 A2 15 25 16 15 18 28 25 26 Function Independent function Dependent function Un Un T1 H1 T2 H1 15-18 head 15-18 cool Chart information: Un –supply voltage T1 –set temperature of thermostat 1 T2 –set temperature of thermostat 2 H1 –set hysteresis of thermostat 1 H2 –set hysteresis of thermostat 2 15-18 output contact of thermostat 1 25-28 output contact of thermostat 2 25-28 T1 15-18 no blocking 15-18 blocking H2 H2 H1 H1 Blocking function: When DIP switch 4 is in position ON, condition for thermostat switching is switching output 15-18 at both individual thermostats ( series function). Thus it is possible to use e.g. first thermostat as operational and the other as an emergency one. Output 25-28 functions normally , according to T2. This device includes 2 thermostats in one. Thermostat has 2 thermo inputs, 2 outputs and individual temperature setting. It offers two possibilities of use. Firstly it can be used as two individual thermostats (e.g. for monitoring two temperature levels of one device or as a control of individual devices), secondly it is possible to set depending function of both thermostats, when thermostat 2 blocks thermostat No.1 Advantage of this thermostats is a wide temperature range - 40.. +110 °C (in one device) with very good mechanical accuracy of setting. It is due to 10-state switch for thermo ranges and its scale by 15 °C(59 °F) . VIt is possible to use fine tuning by potentiometer by 0-15 °C(32-59 °F) with accuracy ±1 °C/ 34 °F . Device has in-built control of sensor fault ( yellow LED). It is possible to set hysteresis 0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F). It is possible to operate the thermostat only with one sensor. In that case it is necessary to connect a resistor 10 kΩ to the other input. This is a part of delivery. 90 Thermostat for monitoring temperature of motor winding TER-7 ! It monitors temperature in range of PTC thermistor ! Fixed levels of switching ! PTC sensor is used for sensing, It is in-built in motor winding by its manufacturer ! MEMORY function - active by DIP switch ! RESET of faulty state: a) button on the front panel b) by external contact (remote by two wires) EAN code TER-7: 8595188137164 Technical parameters: Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: Cold sensor resistance: Upper level: Botton level: Sensor: Sensor failure indication: Accuracy Accuracy in repetition: Switching difference: Temperature dependance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Breaking capacity: Inrush current: Min. breaking capacity DC: Mechanical life: Electrical life (resistive): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring, red LED flashing indicates faulty sensor ! Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A /250 V AC1 ! Red LED shines and indicates exceeded temperature ! Terminals of sensor are galvanically separated, they can be shorted out by terminal PE without damaging the device ! Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24-240 V ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting TER-7 monitoring temperature of motor winding A1-A2 AC/ DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz) max. 2 VA -15 %; +10 % Description Supply terminals Output contacts A2 A1 25 28 26 Faulty states indication Supply voltage indication MEMORY function Function TEST Ta-Tb 50 Ω - 1.5 kΩ 3.3 kΩ 1.8 kΩ PTC temperature of motor winding blinking red LED RESET button < 5% ±5% < 0.1 % / °C Ta 2x changeover/DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)8 A / AC1 2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC 10 A /< 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500mW 3x107 0.7x105 Symbol 15 16 R Tb 18 Output contacts Terminals for sensor and reset Connection A1 16 18 26 28 A1 A2 Ta -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F) 25 26 28 PTC Tb -30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F) 4 kV (supply - output) 15 25 R A2 any 15 16 18 DIN rail EN 60715 Ta R Tb IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals III. PTC 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 AWG (12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) Note 83 g (2.9 oz.) Sensors could be in series in abide with conditions in technical specification - switching limit. EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Warning!: In case of supply from the main, neutral wire must be connected to terminal A2. Function Ω Ω 3.3 Ω 1.8 Ω Ω Ω red LED memory PTC / TK The device controls temperature of motor winding with PTC thermistor which is mostly placed in motor winding or very close to it. Resistance of PTC thermistor run to max 1.5 kΩ in cold stage. By temperature increase the resistance goes strongly up and by overrun the limit of 3.3 kΩ the contact of output relay switch off - mostly contactor controlling a motor. By temperature decrease and thereby decrease of thermistor resistance under 1.8 kΩ the output contact of relay again switches on. The relay has function “Control of sensor fault“. This controls interruption or disconnection of sensor.When switch is in position “TK” monitoring of faulty sensor is not functional - it is possibel to connect bimetal sensor with only 2 states: ON or OFF. The device can work with bi-metal sensor in this position. Other safety unit is function “Memory”. By temperature overrun (and output switches off ) the output is hold in faulty stage until service hit. This bring the relay to normal stage (with RESET button) on front panel or by external contact (remote). 91 TER-9 INNOVATION! A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2 28 15 16 18 25 26 EAN code TER-9/230V: 8595188124478 TER-9/24V: 8595188129190 Technical parameters: Supply Number of function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Burden: Operating range: Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: Temperature range: Hysteresis (sensitivity): Diference temperature: Sensor: Sensor failure indication: Accuracy Measuring accuracy: Repeat accuracy: Temperature dependance: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Max. breaking capacity: Switching voltage: Min. breaking capacity DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Time circuit Power back-up: Accuracy: Min. switching interval: Data stored for: Program circuit Number of memory places: Program: Data readout: Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Operating position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: 92 Digital thermostat with 6 functions and built-in time switch clock with day, week and year program. You can also limit temperature functions and courses this way in real time. ! Complex control of home and water heating, solar heating, etc. ! Two thermostats in one, two temperature inputs, two outputs with dry contact ! Maximum universal and variable thermostat including all ordinary thermostat functions ! Functions: two independent thermostats, dependent thermostat, differential thermostat, two level thermostat, zone-based thermostat, dead zone thermostat ! Program setting of output functions, calibration of sensors according to reference temperature (offset) ! The thermostat is subject to the digital clock programs ! Wide operating range of temperature settings, the possibility of measuring in 0C and 0F ! Clear display of set and measured data on a backlit LCD ! Power supply: AC 230V or 24V AC/DC (based on type of device) ! The time switch clock has a battery backup, which retains data in case of a power outage (reserve backup time - up to 3 years) ! Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required ! Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A / 250 V AC1 for each output ! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting ! TER-9 Symbol Connection Senzor 1 Sensor Sensor Senzor 2 Un 6 A1 - A2 AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated, AC/DC 24V galvanically unseparated max. 4 VA -15 %; +10 % CR 2032 (3V) T1-T1 and T2-T2 -40.. +110 °C in an adjustable range 0.5.. 5 °C adjustable 1.. 50 °C termistor NTC 12 kΩ pi 25 °C displayed on the LCD 5% < 0.5 °C < 0.1 % / °C 1x changeover for each input/SPDT, (AgNi) 8 A / AC1 2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC 250 V AC1 / 30 V DC symbol ON/OFF A1 18 16 26 28 A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2 T1 T1 T2 T2 °C A2 15 25 15 16 18 25 26 28 Description of visual elements on the display Displaying the day Status indication (1st channel) Status indication (2nd channel) Auto + t Prog Operation mode indication Man Displays 12/24 hour mode Indication of the switching program Display of date / temperature 1 and 2 of setting menu Time display Control button MAN2 / ESC Control button PRG+ Reset 1x107 1x105 up to 3 year max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C 1 min min. 10 years Control button OK Control button MAN1 / - Device description Sensor-Terminal 1 Sensor-Terminal 2 Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2) A1 100 daily, weekly, yearly LCD display, with back light -10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to 131 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4 kV (power supply - output) any DIN rail EN 60715 IP 20 terminals, IP 40 from front panel III. 2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (230V) 127 g (24V) 120 g EN 61812-1. EN 61010-1. EN 60730-2-9; EN 60730-1; EN 60730-2-7 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2 Auto Backlight display MAN 2 OK MAN RESET Control buttons ESC PRG + _ Lead-sealing point 28 15 16 18 25 26 Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery Output - Channel 1(15-16-18) Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28) Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9 2 independent single-stage thermostats Heating functions T1 H1 H1 Ts1 dy1 dy2 dy2 dy1 15-18 Heating functions T2 H2 H2 Ts2 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 25-28 Legend: Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1 Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2 T1 - adjusted temperature T1 T2 - adjusted temperature T2 H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1 H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1 - set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking 15-18 output contact (for T1) 25-28 output contact (for T2) Classic function of thermostat, output contact switched until adjusted temperature is reached. Hysteresis eliminates frequent switching - output oscillation. Legend: Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1 Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2 T1 - adjusted temperature T1 T2 - adjusted temperature T2 H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1 H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking 25-28 output contact (for T2) 15-18 output contact (intersection T1 and T2) Output 15-18 is closed, if temperature of both thermostats is bellow an adjusted level. When any thermostat reaches adjusted level, the contact 15-18 opens. Serial inner connection of thermostats (logic function AND). Legend: Ts1 - real (measured) temperature T1 Ts2 - real (measured) temperature T2 D - adjusted difference dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking 15-18 output contact (for T1) 25-28 output contact (for T2) Switching of output corresponds with input, which has lower temperatures when diff ference is exceeded. Differencial thermostat is used for keeping two identical temperature e.g. in heating systems (boiler and reservoir), solar systems (collector - reservoir, exchanger), water heating (water heater, water distribution)etc. Legend: Ts - real (measured) temperature T1 - adjusted temperature D - adjusted difference H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1 H2 - T=T1-D dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking 15-18 output contact 25-28 output contact Typical example of use for two-stage thermostat is e.g in boiler-room, where there are two biolers from which one is main and the other one is auxiliary. The main boiler is managed according to set temperature and auxiliary boiler is switched in case temperature falls under set difference. Thus it helps to the main boiler in case outside temperature dramatically falls. In the range of set difference (D) output 15-18 functions as normal thermostat to input 1 (type 1). In case temperature falls under set difference, second output switches too. Legend: Ts - real (measured) temperature T1 - adjusted temperature T2 - adjusted temperature T=T1-D H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1 H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking 15-18 output contact 25-28 output contact Output is closed (heating) only if temperature is within adjusted range. If temperature is out of range, the contact opens. T is set as T1-D. The function is used for protection of gutters against freezing. Legend: Ts - real (measured) temperature T1 - adjusted temperature T2- T=T1-D H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1 H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking 15-18 output contact (heating) 25-28 output contact (cooling) In case of thermostat with a „dead zone“ , it is possible to set temperature T1 and a diff erence (respectively a width of dead zone D). If temperature is higher than T1, output contact of cooling switches ON; if the temperature gets bellow T1, the contact switches OFF. If the temperature gets bellow temperature T, the contact of heating switches ON and it switches OFF when temperature T is exceeded. This function can be used for example for automatic air warming and cooling in ventilation so the sit is always within the range T1 and T. Depending functions of 2 thermostats H2 Ts2 T2 dy2 dy1 H2 H2 dy2 dy1 25-28 H1 Ts1 T1 dy1 dy2 15-18 dy2 dy1 dy1 dy2 H1 H1 dy1 dy1 dy2 15-18 Dierential thermostat Ts1 D-H1 D D-H2 D Ts2 D dy2 dy1 15-18 dy1 dy2 dy1 25-18 2-stage thermostat H1 T1 D T H1 H1 Ts H2 H2 H2 dy1 dy2 dy2 dy1 dy1 dy2 15-18 dy1dy2 dy1 25-28 Thermostat with “ WINDOW” T1 H1 Ts H1 H1 D H2 H2 H2 T T2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 15-18 25-28 Thermostat with dead zone H1 T1 Ts D H2 H2 H2 T T2 dy1 dy2 15-18 dy1 25-28 H1 H1 dy2 dy1 93 R oom and floor analog thermostat Thermo ATR - Analog Thermo Room: Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) with a built-in sensor ! ATF - Analog Thermo Floor: Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) with external sensor Function „temporary temperature change“ in range ±10 °C (decreasing / increasing temperature) ! ATC - Analog Thermo Combined: Room and floor thermostat, sensors are connected in series and block each other Function „temporary temperature change“ , fix -5 °C /+23 °F (night decline) Temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) for both sensors, adjustable separately It is possible to use it without external sensor ! Ø 65mm ! EAN code - DEVICE: ATR : 8595188125000 ATF : 8595188130165 ATC : 8595188130172 EAN code - COMPLET: ATR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136228 ATF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135870 ATC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135887 To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except ATR) Technical parameters: Supply Power supply and tolerance: Consumption, frequency: Measuring Temperature range: Accuracy: Hysteresis: Temperature sensor: Night decline: Off set/calibration: Setting Room temperature setting: Floor temperature setting: Offset setting: Night decline setting: Night decline switching: Display Power supply indication: Output ON indication: Night decline indication: Indication of faulty fl oor sensor: ATR ATC ATF AC 230 V ±10 %, 6.5 VA/ 50-60 Hz +5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) room adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F Description Auxiliary button 1* Main knob main knob x main knob x main knob auxiliary button 2 auxiliary button 1 auxiliary button 2 x internal / external internal pushbutton Main switch Indication of night decline Supplyvolatge and output indication Night decline push-button Wiring box Supply cable green LED 1 red LED 1 red / orange LED 2 * Auxiliary button 1 and 2 are accessible after removal of the main knob red LED 2 Connection LED 1 flashing x Standart jumper L-15 (remove when potential-free contact is used) ATR LED 1 flashing potential-free contact NO, material of contact - AgNi 16A/250 V, 4000 VA for AC1 galvanic 3x107 0.7x105 -10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F) -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) 4kV wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝ IP30 in standard conditions solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12) 84 x 89 x 56.4 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.22˝ ) 110 g (3.9 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 If potential-free contact is used ATF ATC L N Design L N Complete offer of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request. 94 Auxiliary button 2* +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) ±2 °C/ 36 °F ±1 °C/ 34 °F floor room + floor adj. ±10 °C/50 °F fix - 5 °C/ 41 °F adj. ± 10 °C/50 °F x Indication- exceeded temp./ext. sensor: Output Type: Max. loadability: Contact separation: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Electrical strength: Mounting: Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ATR, ATF, ATC Night decline is activated by a pushbutton on device or external contact (only ATR) Night decline setting is done by an auxiliary button 2(under main button, only ATR/ATF) Ofset setting (calibration ±10 °C/ 50 °F) with „known“ thermometer. External sensor (TC-3, 3m / 9.84’) is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m/ 328’ Design ELEGANT*, wide range of colors, possibility to combine more frames together Accessories: See page 102 15 18 EXT. SENZOR Digital room and floor thermostat Thermo Ø 65mm EAN code - DEVICE: DTR : 8595188125017 DTF : 8595188135924 DTC : 8595188135931 ! DTR - Digital Thermo Room: Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with a built-in sensor ! DTF - Digital Thermo Floor: Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with external sensor ! DTC - Digital Thermo Combined: Combined thermostat with room and floor sensors and temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) Choice of temperature display from internal or external sensors By program it is possible to choose,which sensor is active and if it should function in serial or in parallel ! DTF, DTC External sensor (TC-3,3m)is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m(328’) Monitoring of disconnection or short-circuit of external sensor, fault is displayed EAN code - COMPLET: DTR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136235 DTF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135863 DTC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135856 To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except DTR) Technical parameters Supply Power supply and tolerance: Consumption, frequency: Backup: Measuring Temperature range: Accuracy: Hysteresis: Temperature sensor: Adjusting Min. temperature cycle: Min. time cycle: Number of programs: Number of events: Offset/calibration: Display LCD display: Displaynig date: Output indication: Output Type: Max.loadability: Contact separation: Mechanical life: Elektrical life: Other information Operating position: Storing position: Electical strenght: Mounting: Protection degree: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: DTR DTF DTC AC 230V ±15%, 1.5 VA, 50-60 Hz rechargable accumulator LIR2032 (40mAh) charging time from 0 to 100%: 3 hours backup time when capacity is 100% 72 hours +5 to +50 °C ( +41 to +122 °C ) ± 0.5 °C / 0.5 °C (± 32.9 °C / 32.9 °C) adjustable 0.5 °C or 1 °C /32.9 or 33.8 °C room (internal) and room (internal) floor (external) floor (external) 0.5 °C (32.9 °F) 10 min. 4; pre- set program 1 2- 6 in a program adjustable ±0.5 °C (32.9 °F) 26x24 mm, with backlight (ON or OFF pernamently) current time, set/ current temperature, day in a week, output status red LED and symbol on LCD Other Funktions DTR, DTF, DTC - programs are pre-set according to most frequently used functions =„Plug and Play “ - pushbutton lock to prevent unwanted manipulation with thermostat - choice of display current/set temperature - „freezing protection“ in case temperature drops below +50 °C (+122 °F) thermostat always switches heating on - choice of function heating or cooling - easy and intuitive control by four push-buttons - automatic shift summer/winter time - holiday mode -it is possible to set temperature and time from 1 hour to 99 days without any intervention into program settings or turning heating off (suitable in case of planned absence holiday...) - modern desing in Elegant line of wall switch buttons, combinations with many colors and multiframes are possible Description of visual elements on the display Program mode Operational mode Time setting Manual mode (permanent/temporary) External sensor Program events Description Wiring box Output indication potential- free contact NO - SPST, material of contact - AgNi (Silver Allow) 16A/250V, 4000VA by AC1 galvanic, electrical strength 4kV 3x107 0.7x105 -10 °C to +55 °C ( +14 °F to +131°F) -20 °C to +70 °C ( -4 °F to +158°F) 4kV IP30 in standard conditions wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝ solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12) 84 x 89 x 54.3 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.14 ˝ ) 120 g (0.26oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1 Day of the week AM/PM Holliday mode Temperature display Display Controlling buttons Supply cable Reset Connection DTR DTF DTC 15 16 A/ 4000VA 250 VμAC1 18 L 16 A/ 4000VA 250 VμAC1 N N EXT. SENZOR Design Complete offer of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request. L L N N Accuracy: See page 102 95 Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1 ! NEW! ! ! ! ! ! This energy-saving digital radiator thermostat is a programmable regulation device for various heaters, but mainly radiators It can be used to regulate temperature in closed rooms, thus helping to lower heat energy consumption; Functions: Manual mode - measuring and checking a manually set temperature Automatic mode - control between two temperatures based on a set time program: - comfort temperature (factory setting 21°C) - energy-saving temperature (factory setting 16°C) Intervals of heating and energy-saving operation can be set using a freely adjustable time program. 8 individually programmable switching times per day: - 4 heating intervals - 4 energy-saving intervals The device features very quiet operation and long battery life (up 5 years) Quick and easy installation EAN code ATV-1 8595188160889 USB programming adapte 8595188160995 Technical parameters: Other functions ATV-1 Operating voltage: Temperature range: Color: Dimensions (L x W x H): Design: 3 V / DC (2 AA batteries 1.5 V / DC AA) + 8.. +28 °C White 76.5 x 53.5 x 63 mm Thermostatic direction valves, electronic Examples of daily heating program: 1. Time function - the desired temperature can be set for a certain adjustable time interval 2. Vacation function - while you‘re gone, you can set and maintain the desired temperature 3. Open window function - when the temperature drops, the heating valve automatically closes in order to save energy 4. Child safety block - blocking against undesired interference with the thermostat 5. Freeze protection - if the temperature drops below 6 °C, the valve opens until the temperature again exceeds 8 °C. This keeps heaters from freezing. Description of device BATHROOM heating heating heating heating 21 °C 21 °C 02 saving 18 18°C°C saving saving saving saving Mo 61 Di 21 Mi Do 8 Fr 4 Sa So : 8:00 - 9:00 10:30 - 12:00 16:00 16:00--17:00 17:00 1. Display 2. Increase temperature 3.Button MENU 4. Button - timer function 5. Decrease temperature 6. OK button - confirm settings AUTO MANU 20:00 20:00--21:30 21:30 1 4 2 5 3 6 LIVING ROOM saving 18 18°C°C topí heating 21 °C 21 °C saving 9:00 - 10:00 Setting for ATV-1: - manual - via USB programming adapter PROGmatic Using the programming port, in seconds your settings will be transferred into the thermostat. saving 17:00 - 20:30 Adapters Type of valve Heimeier, Junkers Landys+Gyr, MNG, Honeywell, Braukmann thread size M 30x1,5 Danfoss RAV (the valve plunger must be fitted with the enclosed pin) Type of adapter No adapter necessary + enclosed pin; only for RAV Package content Package content Danfoss RA Thermostat Danfoss RAVL Adapters Instruction manual 96 Thermostats TEV-2, TEV-3 TEV-2 TEV-3 ! Single thermostat with possibility of temperature management in adjustable range (it is possible to modify this range or make a special one on request) ! Used to regulate heating (or cooling) in demanding environments (outside , humidity, dustiness, etc.) ! Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which enables installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0 ! TEV-2 - control and indication elements are placed under transparent cover ! TEV-3 - control and indication elements are placed directly on the cover (for easy orientation and frequent change of temperature) EAN code TEV-2: 8595188129251 TEV-3: 8595188129268 Technical parameters Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Input: Tolerance of voltage range: Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: Temperature ranges: Hysteresis (sensitivity): Sensor: Faulty sensor indication: Accuracy Accuracy of settings (mechanical): Dependance on temperature: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Max. breaking capacity: Peak current: Switched voltage: Min.switching output DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life (AC1): Other information Operation temperature: Operation position: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Polution level: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: TEV-2 TEV-3 ! Thermostat status is indicated by LED (2 colours) ! Function of monitoring sensor disconnection and short-circuit ! Output changeover /SPDT contact 16A(AC-1) Symbol Connection Function heating one-level thermostat L-N 230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz max. 2.5 VA ±15% L V1 Function cooling V2 T T T- T -20 to +20 °C / -4 °F to +68 °F +5 to+35 °C/ +41 °F to +95 °F 3 °C (± 1.5 °C) / 37,4 °F (± 34.7 °F) thermistor NTC 12 kΩ red LED flashing N L SENSOR NTC SENSOR NTC Description TEV-2 (without cover) 5% < 0.1 % / °C Device status indication 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384W / DC 30 A/ < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24V DC 500 mW red LED 3x107 0.7x105 -30 to +50 °C (-22 °F to 122°F) any IP 65 III. 2 solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12) 110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33˝x 5.3˝x 2.3˝) 266 g (9.38 oz.) 277 g(9.77 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Temperature setting Terminal for sensor Terminals for connection of supply voltage and output contact PG11 PG11 PG9 Sensor Opening for incoming cables Description TEV-3 (cover) Device status indication Function TEV-2,TEV-3 Hysteresis Sensor failure Temperature setting V1 LED red LED green TEV-2 and TEV-3 are universal single thermostats for universal use. In case ambient temperature is higher than set temperature relay is open (function HEATING), for cooling function (opposite function) is possible to use NC contact of relay (V2). PG11 PG11 Opening for incoming cables PG9 Sensor 97 Thermostat TEV-1 EAN code TEV-1: 8595188129121 Technical parameters Function: Supply terminals: Voltage range: Input: Tolerance of voltage range: Measuring circuit Measuring terminals: Temperature ranges: thermostat 1 thermostat 2 Hysteresis (sensitivity): Sensor: Faulty sensor indication: Accuracy Accuracy of settings (mechanical): Dependance on temperature: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Max. breaking capacity:: Peak current: Switched voltage: Min.switching output DC: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life: Other information Operation temperature: Operation position: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution level: Max. cable size (mm2): Dimensions: Weight: Standards: ! Two-level thermostat with function “WINDOW” meaning that output is switched in case the measured temperature is within set range ( adjustable in range -20.. +20 °C/ -4 °F to +68 °F) ! Used as protection against freezing ( water-shoots, pavements, drives, pipes, etc.) heating is on when temperature falls under set upper level (e.g.+5 °C/ +41 °F) and off in case it falls under lower level (e.g.-10 °C /-50 °F , when heating is not able effectively operate) ! Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which allows installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0 ! Thermostat status is indicated by LED (3colors) under transparent cover ! Function monitoring short-circuit and sensor disconnection (break) ! Output changeover contact 16A/ SPDT (AC-1) TEV-1 two-level thermostat L-N 230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz max. 2.5 VA ±15 % Symbol Connection Function heating L V1 Function cooling V2 T T T-T N L -20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F) -20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F) 3°C (± 1.5 °C) thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F ) red LED flashing SENSOR NTC Function 5% < 0.1 % / °C Un 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy) 16 A / AC1 4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC1 / 24 V DC 500 mW LED 3x107 0.7x105 T2 Hysteresis T1 Sensor failure V1 LED red LED green LED orange Description -30 °C to +50 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F) any IP 65 III. 2 solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12) 110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33 ˝x 5.3 ˝x 6.6 ˝) 238 g (8.4 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Device status indication Bottom temperature setting Upper temperature Terminal for sensor connection V1 L V2 N N T1 T1 Description of function TEV-1 is a double thermostat designated for system of protection of roof watershoots against freezing. The device is placed in a waterproof box (IP65), sensor with double insulation,which is a part of the device, senses ambientrature. The device operates as zonal thermostat with independent setting of upper and bottom operational temperature. In case the ambient temperature is higher than T1 (upper temperature), thermostat switches heating of watershoots off (icing melts down). In case the ambient temperature is lower than T2 (bottom temperature), thermostat also switches heating off (to big freezing heating cannot manage to melt the ice). 98 SENSOR NTC PG11 PG11 Terminals for connection of supply voltage and output contact PG9 Sensor Opening for incoming cables Thermostat TEV-4 ! Single point thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…) 153x62x34 IP65 EAN code TEV-4: 8595188140577 ! Built-in thermo-sensor is integrated in the device ! Two fuctions adjustable by jumper: heating and cooling ! 3 adjustable (by jumper) ranges of temperature, and fine adjustment through potentiometer ! 3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis ! Supply voltage 230 V AC ! Potentialless NO- SPST contact 12A AC1 switching Description (proportion is accordant to real size) TEV-4 L-N AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz - 15% .. +10% max. 6VA / 0.7W setting by jumper J3 cooling heating by jumper J2 -30 °C to 0 °C (-22 °F to 32 °F) 0 °C to +30 °C (32 °F to 86 °F) + 30 °C to +60 °C (86 °F to 140 °F) potentiometer 0.5 / 1.5 / 4 °C (32.9 °F/ 34.7 °F/ 39.2 °F) by jumper J1 Cable gommet M16x1.5 for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝ TEV-4 L 15 18 J1 Hysteresis (°C) 1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO2) 12 A / AC1 3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC / 24 V DC 500 mW 3 x 107 0.7 x 105 L N J2 Adjustable range setting (°C) J3 Function cooling heating -30 .. 0 0 .. 30 30 .. 60 0.5 1.5 4 Slight setup finish in the frame of range -30 °C to +65 °C (-22 °F to 149 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down IP65 III. 2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12) CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5) 153 x 62 x 34 mm ( 6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1˝) 148 g (5.2 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1 Function Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝ adjustable hysteresis Temperature sensor Connection L N L N jumper for L potential L 15 18 Actual temperature level Setup temperature level Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝ potentialless NO contacts ~ Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Tolerance of voltage range: Input (apparent/loss): Function Function - : Function - : Temperature setting - range 1: - range 2: - range 3: Slight temperature setting: Hysteresis: Hysteresis setting: Output Output contact: Current rating: Max. breaking capacity: Peak current: Switched voltage: Min.switching output: Mechanical life: Electrical life: Other information Operation temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strengh: Operation position: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution level: Max. cable size (mm2): Suggested power-supply cable: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall 57mm(2.24”) Technical parameters: ! L N 3- wire connection L 15 18 L N 4- wire connection L-N Function heat 15 - 18 Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection). For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting. Function cool 15 - 18 99 H ygro-thermostat RHT-1 ! Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90% EAN code RHT-1: 8595188137263 Technical parameters Possibility of setting of up to 8 conditions for contact switching and function permanently ON/OFF ! Sensor is a part of the device - designated for measuring in switchboards ! Function of sensor control (damage, disturbances...) ! Fixed setting of temperature hysteresis at 2.5 °C / 36.5 °F and humidity at 4% ! Output state is indicated by red LED ! Supply voltage AC/DC 24-240 V ! Output contact 1x NO/ SPDT 16A/250 V AC1 ! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting Device description: RHT-1 Function: Supply terminals: Input: Voltage range: Tolerance of voltage range: Measuring circuit Temperature range: Humidity range: Temperature hysterisis: Humidity hysterisis: Sensor: internal Indication of sensor´s fault: Accuracy Setting accuracy (mechanical): Long-term stability of humidity: Output Number of contacts: Current rating: Switched output: Switched voltage: Output indication: Mechanical life: Electrical life: Other information Operational temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strengh: Operational position: Mounting: Protection degree: Overvoltage category: Pollution degree: Terminal wire capacity (mm2): hygro-thermostat A1 - A2 1VA 24-240V AC / DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz) -15%; +10% Output contacts Ventilative upper oppenings 18 15 TOP Output indication Indication of supply voltage Function setting 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) 50.. 90% 2.5 °C / 36.5 °F 4% internal red LED flashing Temperature setting Humidity setting 5% typical < 0.8% / year 1x NO/SPDT (AgSnO2) 16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC 4000 VA / AC1, 300W / DC 250V AC1 / 24V DC red LED shines 3x107 0.7x105 -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F ) 2.5 kV (supply-output) vertical, with correct orientation DIN rail EN 60715 IP40 from front panel, IP10 on terminals III. 2 max. 2x2:5, max. 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12) 90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 69 g (2.4 oz. ) EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1 Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Symbol Connection A1 15 A2 18 Ventilative lower opennings A2 A1 Supply voltage terminals Funcions: Choice of function A B C D E F G H ON OFF Relay switched under the following conditions T > Tset T < Tset T > Tset T < Tset T < Tset T > Tset T < Tset T > Tset or or or or a a a a relay permanently ON relay permanently OFF RH > RHset RH > RHset RH < RHset RH < RHset RH < RHset RH < RHset RH > RHset RH > RHset Description of functon: 15 18 A2 A1 T RH - + Un 100 ! This device is designated for monitoring of parameters of environment (meaning temperature and relative humidity) in switchboards. It enables setting of eight conditions of constact closing and therefore it is usable for various types of load (e.g. fans, heating, air-conditioning, dehydrating units...). While installing it is neccessary to take into account the fact that hysterisis rises by persistence of measured values between sensor and ambient environment. The device is equipped by sensor fault detection. In case of sensor fault, exceeding allowed limits (for temperature -30°C/ -22 °F and +80°C/ 176 °F; for humidity 5% and 95%) or in case of faulty internal communcation higher than 50% ( due to e.g. high ambient disturbances) contact opens and sensor fault is indicated. Sensor fault doesn´t have influence on function permanently ON or pemanently OFF. Note: In case the conditions for switching are not applied, relay is open. H ygrostat RHV-1 153x62x34 IP65 ! Single hygrostat is used for regulation of humidity in harsh environments (washdown, greenhouse, refrigeration) ! External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall ! Built-in hygro-sensor is integrated in the device ! Two functions adjustable by jumper: moisting and drying ! 3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis ! Supply voltage 230V AC ! NO contact closure 12A/AC1 EAN code RHV-1: 8595188140584 Supply Supply terminals: Voltage range: Input voltage range: Input (apparent/loss): Setting function Function - : Function - : Set. the scale of relative humidity: - range 1: - range 2: - range 3: Slight setting of relative humidity: Hysteresis Hysteresis setting: Output Output contact: Current rating: Switching output: Peak current: Switched voltage: Min.switching output: Mechanical life: Electrical life: Other information Operation temperature: Storing temperature: Electrical strengh: Operation position: Protection degree: Overvoltage cathegory: Pollution level: Max. cable size (mm2): Suggested power-supply cable: Dimensions: Weight: Standards: Description (proportion is accordant to real size) RHV-1 L-N AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz - 15% .. +10% max. 6VA /0.7W Setting function Jumper J3 moistening drying Humidity setting Jumper J2 0 ... 30 % RH 30 ... 60 % RH 60 ... 90 % RH Relative Humidity Setting Potentiometer 2, 3, 4 % from setup rate Jumper J1 Cable gommet M16x1.5 for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝ Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝ RHV-1 L 15 18 J1 Hysteresis (% from value) 1 x NO-SPST (AgSnO2) 12 A / AC1 3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 30 A / < 3 s 250 V AC / 24 V DC 500 mW 3 x 107 0.7 x 105 J2 Adjustable range setting (%RH) J3 Function drying moistening 0 .. 30 30 .. 60 60 .. 90 2 3 4 Slight setup finish in the frame of range -30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F) -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) 4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down IP65 III. 2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5( AWG 12) CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5) 153 x 62 x 34 mm (6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝) 148 g (5.2 oz.) EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1 Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝ L N L N jumper for L potential potentialless NO- SPST contacts L 15 18 Actual humidity level Humidity sensor Connection Function Setup relative humidity level L N 57mm(2.24”) Technical parameters: L N L 15 18 L N Adjustable hysteresis 3- wire connection 4- wire connection L-N Function moistens 15 - 18 Function drying 15 - 18 Device is supplied with a standard jumper. For the device to operate correctly, it must be mounted with the sensor side down. 101 Temperature sensors TC, TZ, PT100 - Accessories to Thermostats ! Thermister temperature sensors are made of Negative Temperature Co-efficient (NTC) embedded in a PVC or metal sleeve with a thermally-conductive sealer Sensor TC - lead-in cable to sensor TC is made of wire CYSY 2Dx0.5 mm/ 0.02” Sensor TZ - cable VO3SS-F 2Dx0.5mm /0.02” with silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications - silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications Sensor PT100 - shielded silicon 2x0.22 mm 2 (AWG 21), shielding connected with a case ! Weight of sensors TC: Weight of sensors TZ: Weight of sensors PT100: - TC-0 - 5 g (0.2 oz.) - TC-3 - 108 g (3.8 oz.) - TC-6 - 213 g (7.5 oz.) - TC-12 - 466 g (16.4 oz.) - TZ-0 - 4.5 g (0.16 oz.) - TZ-3 - 106 g (3.74 oz.) - TZ-6 - 216 g (7.6 oz.) - TZ-12 - 418g (14.7 oz.) - PT100-3 - 68 g (2.4 oz.) - PT100-6 - 149 g (5.3 oz.) - PT100-12 - 249 g (8.8 oz.) ! EAN code TC-0 TC-3 TC-6 TC-12 TZ-0 TZ-3 TZ-6 TZ-12 PT100-3 PT100-6 PT100-12 TC TZ Technical parameters Range: Scanning element: In air/ in water: In air/ in water: Cable material: Terminal material: Protection degree: ! 8595188110075 8595188110617 8595188110082 8595188110099 8595188140591 8595188110600 8595188110594 8595188110587 8595188136136 8595188136143 8595188136150 PT100 TC TZ PT100 0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F) NTC 12K 5 % (65) 92 s / 23 s (95) 306 s / 56 s High temperature PVC High temperature PVC IP 67 -40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F) NTC 12K 5 % (65) 62 s / 8 s (95) 216 s / 23 s Silicone Nickel plated copper IP 67 -30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F) Resistive values of sensors in dependance on temperature Temperature ( 0C/ 0F ) Sensor NTC (kΩ) Sensor PT100 (Ω) 20 / 68 14.7 107.8 30 / 86 9.8 111.7 40 / 104 6.6 115.5 50 / 122 4.6 119.4 60 / 140 3.2 123.2 70 / 158 2.3 PT 100 (0.5) -/7s (0.9) - / 19 s Silicone Copper IP 67 127.1 0 Tolerance of sensor NTC 12 kΩ is ± 5% by 25 C/ 77 F . Long-term resistence stability by sensor PT100 is 0.05% (10 000 hours) 65 (95): time, which sensor needs to heat up on 65 (95) % of ambient temperature of environment, in which is located TZ: Temperature sensors for range -40 ° C to +125 ° C (-40 ° F to 257 ° F) TC-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal block (sensor length 110 mm/4.33") TC-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´) TC-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´) TC-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´) TZ-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal block (lenght of sensor 110mm/ 4.33˝) TZ-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´) TZ-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´) TZ-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´) Diagramm of sensor warm up via air 70 PVC Silikon 60 50 a [oC] TC: Temperature sensors for range 0 ° C to +70 ° C (32 ° F to 158 ° F) 0 40 30 PT-100: Temperature sensor for range -30 ° C to +200 ° C (-22 ° F to 392 ° F) 20 PT100-3 -Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´), double isolation silicone PT100-6 -Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´), double isolation silicone PT100-12 -Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´), double isolation silicone 10 0 00:00 02:53 05:46 08:38 11:31 14:24 17:17 s [min] Sensor drawing TC 20 mm/ 0.8˝ PT100 8.2 mm 0.3˝ TZ 4.6 mm 0.2˝ 24 mm / 0.9˝ PVC -reaction to water temperature from 22.5 0C to 58 0C (from 72.5 0F to 136.4 0F) Silicone - reaction to water temperature from 22.5 0C to 63.5 0C (from 72.5 0F to 144.5 0F) 22.65 mm/ 0.9˝ 6.2 mm 0.2˝ Sensor photo Installation box LKM-45 TC TZ Recommended installation box for wall mounting of THERMO thermostats PT100 Type LKM- 45, dimensions: 98x98x45 mm, color: white EAN code: 8595188130806 102 Installation contactors Installation contactors VS VS120 VS220 Number of contacts: 1x20 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 10, 01 Number of contacts: 2x20 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 20, 11, 02 VS420 Number of contacts: 4x20 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 40, 31 VS425 VS440 VS463 Number of contacts: 4x25 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 40, 31, 22, 04 Number of contacts: 4x40 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 40, 31, 22, 04 Number of contacts: 4x63 A Konfigurace spínacích a rozpínacích kontakt˝: 40, 31, 22 Installation contactors with manual control VSM VSM220 VSM425 Number of contacts: 2x20 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 20, 11, 02 Number of contacts: 4x25 A Configuration of switching and breaking contacts: 40, 31, 22, 04 Accessories Auxiliary contacts VSK VSK-11 VSK-20 auxiliary contacts: 1x switching, 1x breaking. auxiliary contacts: 2x switching Installation spacer IKV Module spacer Contactror‘s loadability and dimensions x 4 3 2 1 y 103 103 Installation contactors VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463 ! ! ! ! EAN code see page 108 Technical parameters Rated insulation voltage (Ui): Rated thermo-current lth (in AC): Switched operation AC-1 for 400 V, 3 phase: AC-1 for 230 V: AC-3 for 400 V, 3 phase: AC-3 for 230 V: AC-7a for 400 V, 3 phase: AC-7a for 230 V: AC-7b for 400 V, 3 phase: AC-7b for 230 V: AC-15 for 400 V, 1 phase: AC-15 for 230 V, 1 phase: DC1 Ue = 24 V: DC1 Ue = 110 V: DC1 Ue = 220 V: Loadability of modular contactors see page143 The max. number of switching for max. load: Electrical life in 230 / 400 V AC-1- resistive load : AC-3-power load: AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp: AC-5b - incandescent lamps : AC-7a - resistive household devices: AC-7b - inductive household devices: Minimal load: Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM: Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1: Electrical strenght: Contacts - max. cable size: Solid conductor: Stranded conductor: Maximal torque: Coil - max. cable size: Solid conductor: Stranded conductor: Max. torque: Operating Coil control voltage: Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %: Coil gear supply +/- 10 %: Mounting side-by-side: Weight: Dimensions: Standards: For switching electric circuits, especially for resistave loads and three-phase induction motors number of contacts VS120: 1 number of contacts VS220: 2 number of contacts VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463: 4 It is produced in configuration of switching and breaking contacts: VS120: 10, 01 VS220: 20, 11, 02 VS420: 40, 31 VS425: 40, 31, 22, 04 VS440: 40, 31, 22, 04 VS463: 40, 31, 22 Protection IP 20 - on request we deliver covers that ensure protection IP 40 for all terminals DIN rail or panel mounting VS120 VS220 VS420 VS425 VS440 VS463 230 V 20 A 230 V 20 A 415 V 20 A 440 V 25 A 440 V 40 A 440 V 63 A x 4 kW, 1 phase x 1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase x 4 kW, 1 phase x 1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase 4A 6A 20 A 6A 0.6 A x 4 kW, 1 phase x 1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase x 4 kW, 1 phase x 1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase 4A 6A 20 A 6A 0.6 A 13 kW 7.5 kW, 3 phase 2,2 kW 1.1 kW, 3 phase 13 kW 7.5 kW, 3 phase 2,2 kW 1.1 kW, 3 phase 4A 6A 20 A 2A 0.5 A 16 kW 9 kW, 3 phase 4 kW 2.2 kW, 3 phase 16 kW 9 kW, 3 phase 4 kW 2.2 kW, 3 phase 4A 6A 25 A 6A 0.6 A 26 kW 16 kW, 3 phase 11 kW 5.5 kW, 3 phase 26 kW 16 kW, 3 phase 11 kW 5.5 kW, 3 phase 4A 6A 40 A 4A 1.2 A 40 kW 24 kW, 3 phase 15 kW 8.5 kW, 3 phase 40 kW 24 kW, 3 phase 15 kW 8.5 kW, 3 phase 4A 6A 63 A 4A 1.2 A 600 switch/hr. 600switch/hr. 600 switch/hr. 600 switch/hr. 600 switch/hr. 0.2x106 0.3x106 0.1x106 by 30 F 0.1x106 by 2 kW 0.2x106 0.3x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 20 A 2 4 kV 0.2x106 0.3x106 0.1x106 by 30 F 0.1x106 by 2 kW 0.2x106 0.3x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 20 A 2 4 kV 0.2x106 0.3x106 0.3x106 by 36 F 0.1x106 by 2 kW 0.2x106 0.3x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 20 A 2 4 kV 0.2x106 0.5x106 0.1x106 by 36 F 0.1x106 by 2 kW 0.2x106 0.3x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 25 A 2 4 kV 0.1x106 0.15x106 0.1x106 by 220 F 0.1x106 by 4 kW 0.1x106 0.15x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 63 A 2 4 kV 0.1x106 0.15x106 0.1x106 by 330 F 0.1x106 by 5 kW 0.1x106 0.15x106 ≥ 24 V, ≥ 100 mA 80 A 2 4 kV AWG 7 (10 mm2) 6 mm2 1.2 Nm AWG 7 (10 mm2) 6 mm2 1.2 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 1.2 Nm AWG 7 (10 mm2) 6 mm2 1.2 Nm AWG 3 (25 mm2) 16 mm2 3.5 Nm AWG 3 (25 mm2) 16 mm2 3.5 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AC/DC 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 230 V 2.1 VA/2.1 W 2.1 VA/2.1 W max. 2 contactors** 120 g (4.2 oz.) 17.5x85x60 mm (0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝) AC/DC 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 230 V 2.1 VA/2.1 W 2.1 VA/2.1 W max. 2 contactors** 130 g(4.6 oz.) 17.5x85x60 mm (0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝) AC 24 V, 48 V 110 V, 230 V 5 VA/1.5 W 30 VA/25 W max. 2 contactors** 170 g(6 oz.) 35x62.5x57 mm (1.4˝x 2.7˝x 2.24˝) AC/DC 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 230 V 2.6 VA/2.6 W * 2.6 VA/2.6 W * max. 2 contactors** 213 g(7.5 oz.) 35x85x60 mm (1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝) AC/DC 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 230 V 5 VA/5 W 5 VA/5 W max. 2 contactors** 400 g(14 oz.) 53.3x84x60 mm (2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝) AC/DC 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 230 V 5 VA/5 W 5 VA/5 W max. 2 contactors** 400 g (14 oz.) 53.3x84x60 mm (2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝) 600 switch/hr. IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660 * 3.8 VA/3,8 W for -04 version of contacts ** Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We offer installation spacer of type IKV. 104 104 Connection VS120 VS120-10 VS120-01 1 A1 + R1 A1 + 2 A2 - R2 A2 VS220-02 1 3 A1 + 1 R3 A1 + R1 R3 A1 + 2 4 A2 - 2 R4 A2 - R2 R4 A2 - VS420-40 VS420 VS420-31 1 3 5 7 13 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 2 4 6 8 14 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 VS425-40 VS425 1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43 A1 + 1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41 A1 + 2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44 A2 - 2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42 A2 - Photo VS425 VS425-04 1 13 R3 21 R5 31 7 43 + A1 2 14 R4 22 R6 32 8 44 A2 - VS440-40 R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41 A1 + R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42 A2 - VS440-31 1 3 5 7 13 A1 + 1 3 5 R3 A1 + 2 4 6 8 14 A2 - 2 4 6 R4 A2 - R1 R3 R5 R7 A1 + R2 R4 R6 R8 A2 - VS440-22 VS463 Photo VS420 VS425-31 VS425-22 VS440 Photo VS120 Photo VS220 VS220-11 VS220-20 VS220 - Photo VS440 Photo VS463 VS440-04 1 R3 R5 7 A1 + 2 R4 R6 8 A2 - VS463-40 VS463-31 VS463-22 1 3 5 7 (13) A1 + 1 3 5 R3 A1 + 1 R3 R5 7 A1 + 2 4 6 8 (14) A2 - 2 4 6 R4 A2 - 2 R4 R6 8 A2- Auxiliary contacts for VS425, VS440. VS463 and VSM220, VSM425 Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20 Ambient temperature: Rated insulation voltage (Ui): Electrical strength: Rated current 230 V (AC 15): Rated current 400 V (AC 15): Max. switching frequence: The max. number of switching for max. load: Minimal load: Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM: Solid/ Stranded conductor (max): Maximal torque: Weight: Dimensions: -5 0C to +55 0C (23 0F to 131 0F ) 500 V 4 kV 6A 4A 6A 600 sep./hod. ≥ 12 V, ≥ 10 mA 6A 2.5 mm† A( WG 10)/ 2.5 mm† A( WG 10) 0.8 Nm 10 g (0.35 oz.) 10x85x60 mm (0.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝) Connection of auxiliary contact VSK-11 and VSK-20 EAN code see paga 108 VSK-11 31 43 32 44 VSK-20 23 33 24 34 105 105 Installation contactors with manual control VSM220, VSM425 ! ! ! ! ! ! EAN code see page 122 Technical parameters: Rated insulation voltage (Ui): Rated thermo-current lth (in AC): Switched operation AC-1 for 400 V: AC-1 for 230 V: AC-3 for 400 V: AC-3 for 230 V: AC-7a for 400 V: AC-7a for 230 V: AC-7b for 400 V: AC-7b for 230 V: AC-15 for 400 V: AC-15 for 230 V: DC1 Ue = 24 V: DC1 Ue = 110 V: DC1 Ue = 220 V: Loadability of modular contactors see page 147 The max. number of switching for max. load: Electrical life in 230 / 400 V AC-1- resistive load : AC-3-power load: AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp: AC-5b - incandescent lamps : AC-7a - resistive household devices: AC-7b - inductive household devices: Minimal load: Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM: Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1: Electrical strenght: Contacts - max. cable size: Solid conductor: Stranded conductor: Maximal torque: Coil - max. cable size: Solid conductor: Stranded conductor: Max. torque: Operating Coil control voltage: Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %: Coil gear supply +/- 10 %: Mounting side-by-side: Weight: Dimensions: Standards: VSM220 Special version of installation contactors with not only basic functions but also with manual control For switching accumulative appliances for heating and service water warming Description of individual positions of manual control AUTO: common function as with installation contactors without manual control 1 - shifting from AUTO to 1: operational contacts are closed and back contacts are open until there is another impulse to a contactor coil 0 - contacts are open (operational contact) or closed (stand-by contact) regardless voltage Optical indicator: ON-OFF It is produced in configuration of making and breaking contacts: VSM220: 20. 11, 02 VSM425: 40. 31, 22, 04 It is possible to connect auxiliary contacts VSK to contactors VSM220, VSM425 Connection VSM220 VSM425 230 V 20 A 440 V 25 A X 4 kW, 1 phase X 1,3 kW only NO, 1 phase X 4 kW, 1 phase X 1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase 4A 6A 20 A 6A 0.6 A 16 kW, 3 phase 9 kW, 3 phase 4 kW, 3 phase 2.2 kW, 3 phase 16 kW, 3 phase 9 kW, 3 phase 4 kW, 3 phase 2.2 kW, 3 phase 4A 6A 25 A 6A 0.6 A 600 switch/hr. 600 switch/hr. VSM220-11 1 3 A1 1 R3 A1 2 4 A2 2 R4 A2 VSM220-02 R1 R3 A1 R2 R4 A2 Connection VSM425 VSM425 - only AC supply voltage VSM425-40 6 1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43 A1 2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44 A2 6 0.2x10 0.3x106 0.1x106 by 30 F 0.1 106 by 1.5 kW 0.2x106 0.3x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 20 A 2 4 kV 0.2x10 0.5x106 0.1x106 by 36 F 0.1x106 by1.5 kW 0.2x106 0.5x106 ≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA 25 A 2 4 kV AWG 7 (10 mm2) 6 mm2 1.2 Nm AWG 7 (10 mm2) 6 mm2 1.2 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AWG 10 (2.5 mm†) 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V, 48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V 2.8 VA/1.2 W 12 VA /10 W max. 2 contactors* 140 g (4.9 oz.) 17,5x85x60 mm (0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝) AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V, 48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V 5.5 VA/1.6 W 33 VA/25 W max. 2 contactors* 260 g (9.17 oz.) 35x85x60 mm (1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝) VS425-31 1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41 A1 2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42 A2 VSM425-22 1 13 R3 21 R5 31 7 43 A1 2 14 R4 22 R6 32 8 44 A2 VSM425-04 R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41 A1 R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42 A2 Auxiliary contacts VSK-11 and VSK-20 Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20 see page 108 IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660 *Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We offer installation spacer of type IKV. 106 106 VSM220 - only AC supply voltage VSM220-20 Loadability of installation contactors TYPE OF LIGHT Incandescent lamps Flourescent lamps Flourescent lamps lead-lag circuit Flourescent lamps parallel correction Flourescent lamps with electronic ballast units (EVG) High-pressure mercury-vapour lamps uncorrected High-pressure mercuryvapour lamps parallel correction Halogen metal vapour lamps uncorrected Halogen metal-vapour lamps parallel correction High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel correction Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel correction OPERATION (W) 60 100 200 500 1000 18 24 36 58 18 24 36 58 18 24 36 58 1 x 18 1 x 36 1 x 58 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 35 70 150 250 400 1000 2000 35 70 150 250 400 1000 2000 150 250 400 1000 150 250 400 1000 18 35 55 90 135 180 18 35 55 90 135 180 I (A) 0.26 0.43 0.87 2.17 4.35 0.37 0.35 0.43 0.67 0.11 0.14 0.22 0.35 0.12 0.15 0.2 0.32 0.09 0.16 0.25 0.17 0.32 0.49 0.61 0.8 1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4 7.5 0.28 0.41 0.65 1.22 1.95 3.45 4.8 0.53 1 1.8 3 3.5 9.5 16.5 0.25 0.45 0.75 1.5 2.5 5.8 11.5 1.8 3 4.7 10.3 0.83 1.5 2.4 6.3 0.35 1.5 1.5 2.4 3.5 3.3 0.35 0.31 0.42 0.63 0.94 1.16 VS120 33 20 10 3 1 22 22 17 14 2 x 30 2 x 24 2 x 17 2 x 10 7 7 7 4 25 15 14 12 7 7 14 10 7 4 2 1 1 4 4 3 1 1 18 10 5 3 3 1 5 2 1 5 3 2 1 22 7 7 4 3 3 6 1 1 1 - VS220 VS420 33 20 10 3 1 22 22 17 14 2 x 30 2 x 24 2 x 17 2 x 10 7 7 7 4 25 15 14 12 7 7 14 10 7 4 2 1 1 4 4 3 1 1 18 10 5 3 3 1 5 2 1 5 3 2 1 22 7 7 4 3 3 6 1 1 1 - 33 20 10 3 1 22 22 17 14 2 x 30 2 x 24 2 x 17 2 x 10 7 7 7 4 25 15 14 12 7 7 14 10 7 4 2 1 1 4 4 3 1 1 18 10 5 3 3 1 5 2 1 5 3 2 1 22 7 7 4 3 3 6 1 1 1 - Number of lights on one contactor’s contact VS425 VS440 VS463 VSM220 33 20 10 3 1 24 24 20 17 2 x 40 2 x 31 2 x 24 2 x 14 8 8 8 5 35 20 19 17 10 9 18 13 9 5 3 2 1 5 5 4 2 1 22 12 7 4 3 1 6 3 1 1 1 6 4 2 1 1 1 27 9 9 5 4 4 7 1 1 1 - 65 40 20 8 4 90 90 65 45 2 x 100 2 x 78 2 x 65 2 x 40 48 48 48 31 100 52 50 50 26 25 38 29 20 10 7 4 3 31 27 22 12 9 5 4 43 23 12 7 6 2 1 36 18 11 6 6 2 1 17 10 6 3 11 6 4 2 71 23 23 14 10 10 44 11 11 8 4 5 85 50 25 10 5 140 140 95 70 2 x 150 2 x 118 2 x 95 2 x 60 73 73 73 47 140 75 72 70 38 36 55 42 29 15 10 6 4 47 41 33 18 13 7 5 60 32 18 10 9 3 1 50 25 15 9 8 3 2 22 13 8 3 16 10 6 3 90 30 30 19 13 13 66 16 16 12 7 8 33 20 10 3 1 22 22 17 14 2 x 30 2 x 24 2 x 17 2 x 10 7 7 7 4 25 15 14 12 7 7 14 10 7 4 2 1 1 4 4 3 1 1 18 10 5 3 3 1 5 2 1 5 3 2 1 22 7 7 4 3 3 6 1 1 1 - VSM425 33 20 10 3 1 24 24 20 17 2 x 40 2 x 31 2 x 24 2 x 14 8 8 8 5 35 20 19 17 10 9 18 13 9 5 3 2 1 5 5 4 2 1 22 12 7 4 3 1 6 3 1 1 1 6 4 2 1 1 1 27 9 9 5 4 4 7 1 1 1 - 107 107 EAN codes EAN codes for VS VS120 VS120-01 24V AC/DC VS120-01 230V AC/DC VS120-10 24V AC/DC VS120-10 230V AC/DC 8595188129381 8595188138628 8595188121422 8595188129374 8595188129398 8595188130790 8595188121408 8595188125253 8595188129411 8595188129428 8595188121392 VS463 VS440 VVS440-04 24V AC/DC VS440-04 110V AC/DC VS440-22 24V AC/DC VS440-22 230V AC/DC VS440-31 24V AC/DC VS440-31 230V AC/DC VS440-40 24V AC/DC VS440-40 110V AC/DC VS440-40 230V AC/DC VS220-02 24V AC/DC VS220-02 110V AC/DC VS220-02 230V AC/DC VS220-11 24V AC/DC VS220-11 48V AC/DC VS220-11 110V AC/DC VS220-11 230V AC/DC VS220-20 24V AC/DC VS220-20 48V AC/DC VS220-20 110V AC/DC VS220-20 230V AC/DC 8595188129299 8595188129305 8595188129787 8595188121477 8595188129572 8595188121460 8595188129565 8595188138567 8595188121453 VS463-22 24V AC/DC VS463-22 230V AC/DC VS463-31 24V AC/DC VS463-31 110V AC/DC VS463-31 230V AC/DC VS463-40 24V AC/DC VS463-40 110V AC/DC VS463-40 230V AC/DC VS425 VS420 VS220 8595188129848 8595188123105 8595188129367 8595188123112 8595188129794 8595188121514 8595188129596 8595188137904 8595188121507 8595188129589 8595188140652 8595188121491 VS420-31 24V AC VS420-31 110V AC VS420-31 230V AC VS420-40 12V AC VS420-40 24V AC VS420-40 48V AC VS420-40 230V AC 8595188129442 8595188129466 8595188121446 8595188129459 8595188129435 8595188138581 8595188121439 VS425-04 24V AC/DC VS425-04 48V AC/DC VS425-04 110V AC/DC VS425-04 230V AC/DC VS425-13 230V AC/DC VS425-22 24V AC/DC VS425-22 230V AC/DC VS425-31 24V AC/DC VS425-31 48V AC/DC VS425-31 110V AC/DC VS425-31 230V AC/DC VS425-40 24V AC/DC VS425-40 48V AC/DC VS425-40 230V AC/DC VS425-40 400V AC/DC EAN codes for VSM VSM220 VSM220-02 24V AC VSM220-02 230V AC VSM220-11 24V AC VSM220-11 230V AC VSM220-20 12V AC VSM220-20 24V AC VSM220-20 230V AC 108 8595188129817 8595188128100 8595188129800 8595188128094 8595188138369 8595188128117 8595188128087 VSM425 VSM425-04 24V AC VSM425-04 230V AC VSM425-22 24V AC VSM425-22 230V AC VSM425-31 24V AC VSM425-31 42V AC VSM425-31 230V AC VSM425-40 12V AC VSM425-40 24V AC VSM425-40 230V AC 8595188129831 8595188128155 8595188129336 8595188128148 8595188129824 8595188160247 8595188128131 8595188143820 8595188128162 8595188128124 VSK-11 8595188121613 VSK-20 8595188121606 8595188129527 8595188129558 8595188143820 8595188121682 8595188129473 8595188129541 8595188121675 8595188129497 8595188137898 8595188129534 8595188121668 8595188129480 8595188136174 8595188121651 8595188129503 Technical information Main regulations for correct use of products Product loadability Electro-magnectic compatibility of products EMC chart Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads 110 111-112 113 114 115 Complementary information Products packing Dimensions 116 117-121 Examples of usage Use of the products in domestic installations Use of the product in the industry Support of project designing Production technology 122-129 131 132 133 134-135 109 Main instructions for correct use of ELK O EP products To ensure correct and perfect function of a device and its safe operation, it is necessary to ensure and observe several main regulations: 1.) Device supply - it is necessary to ensure continuous supply of the device without drops and voltage peaks. It is mainly important for device (e.g. dimmers) where there is synchronization managed by sine wave of the main and fault in the main ca cause unreliable function of the device - it is necessary to observe correct connection of terminals, and in case of DC supply voltage also polarity. - it is necessary to observe allowed tolerance of the size of supply voltage which is given by technical parameters of individual devices 2.) Protection of the device - it is necessary to ensure protection of the device by adequate elements of overvoltage protection – by fuses, by surge arrestors 3.) Elimination of disturbances on input circuits - it is recommended to eliminate disturbances on control inputs of devices by suitable elements (R-C elements) and thus minimize creation of inductive voltage on incoming wires - pay attention when connecting control inputs and while keep in mind max. current and min. voltage at rest, which can cause spontaneous switching of device (e.g. connected glow lamps) 4.) Opereting conditions - to assure the granted life and correct functions of device, there is not recommended to leave the device in extreme conditions that could negative way influence the correct device functions - permanent temperature influence over 70°C, aggressive exhalations, chemicals, high relative humadity over 95%, high electromagnetic field or microwave radiation - for error-free function it is necessary to avoid device placement close to electromagnetic interference source - all mentioned products fulfill the EMC requirements in accordance to EU Directive 89/336/EEC. Notwithstanding it is necessary to pay attention by device connecting to circuit with electrical appliances that produce electromagnetic interference (contactors, motors), and pay attention to close power cables. It is recommended that device connecting cables (supply and control inputs) are possibly short and go separately from power cables. In case the device is connected to circuit with contactors or motors it is necessary to protect the device with appropriate extern protection components - RC members, varistors or surge voltage protector. - when you use AL wires, it is necessary to follow requirements of SN standard 370606: 1959 and SN 370606 amendment 2: 1992 5.) Device handling and using - input terminals do not fill-in with high power (for serial terminals max 0.5 N/m), do not give excessive pressure to carrier terminal parts to avoid demage of inner device construction - protect the device before falls and excessive vibrations that could demage relays contacts - do not overload input relay´s contacts, especially when using loads with other category then AC1 - when at switching of big loads the relay contacts get sealed it is necessary to use inserted contactor or power relay tuned to required load for given application Description of used protection elements in device All time and monitoring relays from our assortment are equiped with protective elements (varistors) against possible overvoltage in supply main. Limit voltage of used varistors is 275 V. At short-time overvoltage in supply main varistor decrease its leak resistor and accumulate arosen overvoltage. When this overvoltage behave as short-time peak, varistor is able to react and protect the device against negative influences. As other protection elements there are used transils and zener diodes that eliminate overvoltage impulses in supply and input circuits of device (e.g. when switching inductive loads). In case of switching inductive loads it is recommended to separate a supply of power element (motors, contactors etc.) from supply of measuring and control device inputs. On the charts bellow you can see oscilographic running of disconnecting of loads (contactors) and reaction of protective elements to arosen voltage pikes. Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on 230V/AC without R-C member Osciloscope configuration U=200 V/d t=5ms/d 110 Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on 230V/AC and R-C member 390 Ohm-330 nF Osciloscope configuration U=200 V/d t=10ms/d Process of disconnection of contactor with coil and limited varistor on 230V/AC Osciloscope configuration U=200 V/d t=5ms/d Product loadability SOU-2 RHV-1;SOU-3; TEV-4 PRODUCT CONTACT TYPE OF LOAD cos 0.95 Material of contact AgSnO2 Material of contact AgSnO2 contact 8A contact 12A CRM-4;CRM-42;MR-41; MR-42; SHT-1;SHT-1/2;SHT-3; SHT-3/2;SHT-4;SMR-B;SOU-1; RHT-1;TER-3A;TER-3B;TER-3C; TER-3D;TER-3E;TER-3F;TER-3G; TER-3H ;VS116K;VS116U; VS316/24V;VS316/230V CRM-82TO;CRM-83J; HRH-6 CRM-93H;PRM-2H; PRM-92H;TER-7;VS308K; VS308U;CRM-61;HRH-5; HRN-54;HRN-54N;HRN-55; HRN-55N;HRN-56; HRN-57;HRN-57N; PRI-32;PRI-51;PRI-52; PRI-53;HRF-10;TER-9 ATC;ATF;ATR;DTC;DTF;DTR; COS-1;CRM-2H;CRM-2HE; CRM-2T;CRM-81J;CRM-91H; CRM-91HE;HRH-1;HRN-33; HRN-34;HRN-35;HRN-37; HRN-41;HRN-42;HRN-43; HRN-43N;HRN-63;HRN-64; HRN-67;PDR-2;PRI-41;PRI-42; PRM-91H;SJR-2;TER-4;TEV-1; TEV-2;TEV-3 Material of contact AgSnO2 contact 16A Material of contact AgNi contact 8A Material of contact AgNi contact 10A Material of contact AgNi contact 16A 250V / 8A 250V / 12A 250V / 16A 250V / 8A 250V / 10A 250V / 16A M 250V / 5A 250V / 3.7A 250V / 5A 250V / 3A 250V / 3A 250V / 5A M 250V /4A 250V /2.2A 250V / 3A 250V /2A 250V /2A 250V / 3A X 230V / 2.2A (510VA) 230V / 3A (690VA) 230V / 1.5A (345VA) 230V / 2A (460VA) 230V / 3A (690VA) X 230V / 2.2A (510VA) till max output C=14UF 230V / 3A (690VA) till max output C=14UF X X X 250W 1 120W 1000W 300W 500W 800W 250V /4A X X X X X 250V /1A 250V / 2.2A 250V / 3A 250V /1A 250V / 2A 250V / 3A 250V /1A 250V / 7.5A X 250V /1A 250V / 6A 250V / 10A X 250V / 4.5A X X 250V / 3.8A 250V / 6A 250V /4A 250V / 4.5A 250V / 6A 250V /3A 250V / 3.8A 250V / 6A 250V /3A 250V / 4.5A 250V / 6A 250V /3A 250V / 3.8A 250V / 6A 30V / 8A 24V / 12A 24V / 10A 24V / 8A 24V / 10A 24V / 16A M 30V / 3A 24V / 4.5A 24V / 3A 24V / 3A 24V / 3.8A 24V / 6A M 30V / 2A 24V / 3A 24V / 2A 24V / 2A 24V / 2.5A 24V / 4A 30V / 8A 24V / 12A 24V / 6A 24V / 8A 24V / 10A 24V / 16A 30V / 2A 24V / 1.5A 24V / 2A 24V / 2A 24V / 1.3A 24V / 2A X 24V / 1.5A X X 24V / 1.3A 24V / 2A AC1 AC2 AC3 AC5a uncompensated AC5a compensated HAL.230V AC5b AC6a AC7b AC12 AC13 AC14 K AC15 DC1 DC3 DC5 DC12 DC13 DC14 111 Product loadability Problematic choice of suitable relay contact for a particular load switched with a product is described below. Mostly we experience problems with incorrect choice of load (meaning incorrect relay for a particular load) which results in permanent switching of contact (sealing) or damage on relay contact – which then results in malfunction. What load can you use? Detailed types of load according to standard EN 60947 are described in charts below – categories of use. Category of use AC current, cosφ = P/S (-) AC-1 Typical use Non-inductive or slightly inductive load, resistance furnace Includes all appliances supplied by AC current with power factor (cos .) 0.95. Examples of usage: resistance furnace, industrial loads AC-2 AC-3 EN Motors with slip-ring armature, switching off Motors with short-circuit armature, motor switching when in operation 60947-4 60947 This category applies to switching off motors with short-circuit armature while in operation. While switching, contactor switches current which is 5 up to 7 times rated current of motor. 60947-4 AC-4 AC-5a AC-5b Electro-motors with short-circuit armature: start up, braking by backset, changeover Switching of electrical gas-filled lights, fluorescent lights El. bulb switching 60947 60947-4 60947-4 AC-6a AC-6b AC-7a AC-7b AC-8a Switching of transformers Switching of capacitors Switching low inductive loads of home appliances and similar applications Load of motors for home appliances Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload AC-8b Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload Enables low contact loading due to resistance of cold fiber is many times smaller that the one of hot fiber. 60947-4 60947-4 60947 60947 60947 Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid 60947 Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid AC-12 AC-13 AC-14 AC-15 Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers Switching of low electro-magnetic loads (max.72 VA) Management of alternating electro-magnetic loads This category applies to switching inductive loads with input for closed electro-magnetic circuit higher than 72 VA Use: switching coils of contactors AC-20 AC-21 AC-22 AC-23 AC-53a DC current, t = L/R (s) DC-1 DC-3 DC-5 DC-6 DC-12 DC-13 DC-14 DC-20a(b) DC-21a(b) DC-22a(b) DC-23 Connecting and disconnecting in unloaded states Switching resistive loads, including low loading Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including low overloading Switching of motor loads or other high inductive loads Switching of motors with short-circuit armature with semiconductor contactors Note: Category AC 15 replaces formerly used category AC 11 Non-inductive or low inductive load, resistive furnaces Shunt motors: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking Series motor: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking Non-inductive or low inductive loads, resistive furnaces – el. bulbs Management of resistive loads and fixed loads with insulation by opto-electric element Switching of electromagnets Switching of electromagnetic loads in circuits with limiting resistor Switching and breaking without load(a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching) Switching ohmic loads including limiting overloading (a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching) Switching of compound ohmic and inductive loads including limited overloads ( e.g. shunt motors) (a: frequent switching, b: random switching) Switching of highly inductive loads (e.g. series motors) 60947-5 60947-5-1 60947-5-1 60947-5 60947-3 60947-3 60947-3 60947-3 60947 60947-4 60947-4-1 60947-4-1 60947-4-1 60947-5-1 60947-5-1 60947-5-1 60947-3 60947-3 60947-3 60947-3 How can you distinguish for which load is our product (relay) designated? Our company record this information on a products and also in our catalogue, instruction manual and other promotional and technical material (website etc.). It is important to realize that it is not always possible to point out load because of lack of information about the device (user cannot measure cos) or it is not possible because of inconstancy of parameters of switched device. Manufacturer of relays records always guaranteed parameters in ideal conditions which are done by a norm (temperature, pressure, humidity, etc.) and reality can be in a lot of cases different. Category of use (classification) of a particular relay is done by material of output contacts. Basic types of materials which are used for production of contacts for high-performance relay are: a)AgCd – suitable for switching ohmic loads. Before of harmfulness of Cd, this type of contact is remitted. b)AgNi –designated for switching resistive loads , good quality switching and conducting (contact doesn’t oxidate) small currents/voltages ,it is not designated for surge currents and loads with inductive component c)AgSn or AgSnO –suitable for switching loads with inductive component , not suitable for switching small currents/voltages, it is more resistive to surge currents, suitable for DC voltage switching, less suitable for switching loads of ohmic type d)Wf (wolfram)-special contact designated for switching surge currents with inductive component e)with gold (AgNi/Au)- Used for “improving” contacts for low currents/ voltages , prevents oxidation. 112 Electromagnetic compatibility of ELK O EP, s.r.o. products Electromagnetic compatability (EMC) is a new scientific field which was founded in the 60s last century. It had been known only to a small number of specialists working in a military and cosmic research. Electromagnetic compatability EMC is defined as an ability of a device, system or a machine to show the correct operation even in an environment in which there are other sources of electromagnetic signals (natural or artificial), and also an ability not to influence negatively the environment by its own “electromagnetic action” and not to radiate signals that would disturb other devices. It is an indicator of good quality and reliability. Breach of such EMC requirements may cause several damages with catastrophical consequences. When testing EMC of a device (technical and biological), basic is represented by so called “ fundamental chain of EMC” shown in the picture. This chain shows a system problematic of EMC and we inspect all three components. SOURCE OF ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES motors, switches, relays, power distributions, semi-conducting alternators, fluorescent tubes, arc furnances, welding machines, oscillators, PC, digital systems, electrostatic discharge... ENVIRONMENT OF DISTRIBUTION, ELECTROMAGNETIC STRUCTURE DISTURBED OBJECT, DISTURBING RECEIVER air space, energy cables, supply convection, convection, grounding, screening, signaling conductors, data condutors... digital devices, PC, measuring devices, automatization device, telecommunication system, data transmission system, wireless set, televisor... Test SURGE For guarantee the immunity of our devices against to electromagnetic disturbance we are doing EMC tests and according results we are still innovating our product to be accoding the EMC norms with reserve. The most important test is immunity against gust of high-energy voltage and current impulse (SURGE), what is made according the norm IEC 61000-4-5. By this our products are controlled in case of short time pulse, what is apllicated as to input as to output circuits of divices, to switching inputs, sensing inputs, etc. Our produts pass all criterias and are fully competitive to foreign products. Test SURGE is used in practice mainly for 1-phase devices with take-off current to 16 A. It makes use of voltage impulse 1,2/50 ms no load and current impulse 8/20 ms for short time. Size of used voltage impulse is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV, size of used current impulse is 2kA on 4kV with choise of changing polarity. For testing by impulses is as coup mode specify capacitive coupling. Test BURST Other very important test is test immunity against quick short-lived effect (couple of impulses- BURST), which dissimulated influence if industry disturbance. Test is made according to the norm IEC 61000-4-4. Disturbance signal is injected to supply circuits and communication cabling. Coupling is made by 1-phase capacitive circuit or coupling capacitive ribband to supply, signalling or data convection of tested device. Size of testing impulses is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV in possitive and negative polarity. Repeat frequence is 2.5 kHz, or 5 kHz. Period of testing 0 - 6 minut by steps for 0.1s. Test POWERFAIL For right function of products in industry is important POWERFAIL test - simulation of decreasing and failure of supply voltage. It is made according to the IEC 61000-4-11. Short-time supply decreasing are random decreasing of supply voltage, which are more than 10 - 15 % of its nominal size and have short time existing 0.5 - 50 periodes of basic frequency 50 Hz. Short breaks of voltage are short time decreasing over 100 %. Mentioned changes of supply circuit voltage are made in practise by disturbance in mains (high voltage, low voltage ) and breaks on load of the main. Test of EMC EMISSIONS Electronic devices must be designed not to be a source of oversize electric or electromagnetic disturbances in its surroundings. Test is executed according to standard EN 55022. Emissions are measured by wires or by air. Test OF ELECTROMAGNETIC HIGH-FREQUENCY FIELD AND HF SIGNAL COMING FROM THE MAIN The purpose of this test is to verify immunity of the device against electromagnetic fields that are created by radio transmitters or by any other device which transmits electromagnetic energy by uninterrupted waves (walkie-talkies, radio and TV transmitters.) Test is carried out against disturbances in the main and emissions. We apply testing level 3 which for HF field means intensity of field 10 V/m and for HF signal it is voltage level 10 V. Test OF ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE It is a test of resistance against discharges of electrostatic energy caused by servicing or by surrounding objects. Such discharge can damage a device or its components. Test is carried out by direct or indirect application of discharges to a tested device. Test is carried out according to a standard EN 61000-4-2. Direct influence of discharges is targeted into such places and surfaces that are accessible to servicing during common use. Indirect influence of discharge is done by horizontal and vertical coupling board. The device is treated by at least ten individual discharges for positive and negative polarity. Testing levels are 2kV, 4kV, 6kV, 8kV, 15kV. Company ELKO EP has its own test laboratory in which it carries out pre-certification for conditions that must be met by each of our products. Thus customers gets not only a product of a high quality, which is ensured by many years of experience in the field of switching relays, but also a product which can operate in demanding conditions of industrial environment. Product, tested this way, guarantees reliability and functionality to customer’s full satisfaction. 113 Power supplies Time relays CRM-81J/230V CRM-81J/UNI CRM-83J/230V CRM-83J/UNI CRM-82TO SJR-2/230V SJR-2/UNI CRM-2T/230V CRM-2T/UNI CRM-2H/230V CRM-2H/UNI CRM-91HE/UNI CRM-2HE/UNI CRM-91H/230V CRM-91H/UNI CRM-93H/230V CRM-93H/UNI CRM-9S CRM-61 SHT-1 SHT-1/2 SHT-3 SHT-3/2 PDR-2A/230V PDR-2A/UNI PDR-2B/230V PDR-2B/UNI PRM-91H/8 PRM-91H/11 PRM-92H PRM-2H SMR-T SMR-H SMR-B CRM-4 CRM-42 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/B 55022/A 55022/B 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/B 55022/A 55022/B 55022/A 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 55022/B 55022/B 55022/A 55022/A 61000-6-3 55022/A 61000-6-3 55022/B 55022/A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 55022/A 55022/A 61000-6-3 55022/B 55022/A 55022/B DIM-2 DIM-5 DIM-14 DIM-6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 55022/B 55014-1 DIM6-3M-P DIM-15 SMR-S SMR-U DIM-10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 55014-1 55014-1 55022/A 55022/B 55022/B Power and auxiliary relays VS116K VS116U VS308K/230V VS308K/UNI VS308U VS316/24V VS316/230V Dimmers 114 PRODUCT PS-10-12; PS-10-24 PS-30-12; PS-30-24 PS-100-12; PS-100-24 PS-30R ZSR-30 ZNP-10-12V ZNP-10-24V 3 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/A/B 61000-6-3 55022/B 55022/B 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 61000-6-3 55022/A 61000-6-3 55022/B 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 55022/A 61000-6-3 61000-6-3 55022/A 55022/A 55022/A 61000-6-3 Other modular devices SOU-1/230V SOU-1/UNI SOU-2 SOU-3 MR-41/230V MR-41/UNI MR-42/230V MR-42/UNI Monitoring relays HRN-41 HRN-42 HRN-33 HRN-34 HRN-35 HRN-37 HRN-63 HRN-64 HRN-67 HRN-55 HRN-55N HRN-57 HRN-57N HRN-54 HRN-54N HRN-56/120 HRN-56/208 HRN-56/240 HRN-56/400 HRN-56/480 HRN-56/575 HRN-43 HRN-43N PRI-32 PRI-51/1 PRI-51/2 PRI-51/5 PRI-51/8 PRI-51/16 PRI-51/0.5 PRI-52 PRI-41 PRI-42 HRH-1/230V HRH-1/24V HRH-1/110V HRH-5 STANDARD PRODUCT HRH-4/230V HRH-4/24V HRH-6/AC HRH-6/DC COS-1 levels according to SN EN 61000-4-4 according to norm SN EN 61000-4-5 EMC; EMISE according to norm SN EN PRODUCT STANDARD levels according to SN EN 61000-4-4 according to norm SN EN 61000-4-5 EMC; EMISE according to norm SN EN STANDARD levels according to SN EN 61000-4-4 according to norm SN EN 61000-4-5 EMC; EMISE according to norm SN EN EMC - parameters 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 55022/B 55022/B 61000-6-3 55022/A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 55022/B 61000-6-3 55022/B 61000-6-3 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B 55022/B Thermostats TER-3A TER-3B TER-3C TER-3D TER-3E TER-3F TER-3G TER-3H TER-4/230V TER-4/24V TER-9/230V TER-9/24V TER-7 ATR; ATC; ATF DTR; DTC; DTF TEV-1 TEV-2 TEV-3 TEV-4 RHT-1 RHV-1 Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads As is our good tradition, we have always been seeking for a maximum universality of our products. We have successfully developed a dimmer DIM-15 and SMR-M, and because the LED lighting dimming - as well as dimming of energy saving lamps - is a relatively new area and there are not so many manufacturers who produce dimmable energy saving resources, we will gradually test and expand the chart below. We welcome your feedback and cooperation in addressing us your comments and new types. Type Typ Light sources ELKO Lighting RFDSC-11 RFDSC-71 RFDEL-71B Yes 30 pc 16 pc 30 pc 30 pc 16 pc Yes 50 pc 26 pc 50 pc 50 pc 26 pc Dimmable E27 GU-10 ELKO Lighting DLB-E27-806-2K7 ELKO Lighting LED DLSL-GU10-250-3K DIM 15 SMR-M LIC-1 Socket The maximum number of units can be connected to dimmers Socket Dimmable Brilum LED line 18led GU-10D Yes Brilum LED line GU-10P Yes E27 Yes Elim SMD-W12 GU-10 Yes Elim SDW21 GU-10 Yes Elim SMD-W20 GU-10 No Panlux E27L1-81120/T E27 No LED LAMPJDRE27 E27 Yes GU10D Yes Osram dulux el.dimmable lumilux warm white 1230lm E27 Yes Megaman dimmerable 2700K DEC01 E14 Yes Lumee GU 10-60-CW-120 GU-10 Yes Lumee GU 10-P-60-CW-120 GU-10 Yes Lumee JDRE 14-60-CW-120 E14 Yes Lumee Ball-80-CW E14 Yes Philips Master 20W E27 No Led Osram Decospot 0,75W GU-10 No Led Philips Master 7W GU-10 No Philips LEDspot MV 4W GU10 40D GU-10 Yes Philips LEDspot MR 16 LV 4W GU5,3 24D GU-5.3 No Philips LEDspot MV 3W GU10 25D GU-10 No Energetic BULB Warm White 250 Lumen E27 Yes Energetic BULB Clear Warm White 250 Lumen E27 Yes Energetic Warm White Reflector GU10 600 CD GU-10 Yes Energetic Cool White Reflector GU10 550 CD GU-10 Yes Energetic Warm White Dimmer 1200 Lumen E27 Yes Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 1300 Lumen E27 No Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 520 Lumen E27 No TR-0WGE-05 E27 No GU-10 No Osram parathom classic A 40 E27 No Osram parathom classic B 25 E14 No GU-10 No EMOS 48led 2W E14 Yes EMOS dimmable saving fluorescent lamps 20W E27 Yes Light sources from manufacturers Type Brilum LED line JCR-27D 48Led Brilum Led line white 21led Paulmann reflector electrobnic 7W GU 10 Osram parathom PAR16 115 Products packing 116 Products Packing COS-1,HRH-1,HRN-41,HRN-42, HRN-43,PDR-2,PRI-41,PRI-42, PS-12,PS-24,PS-R,ZSR-30, ZNP-10,ZTR-10,HRN-56/480, 575 Packing of 3-MODULE relay - 1 pc SHT-1,SHT-3,SHT-1/2,SHT-4, SOU-2,TER-9, Packing of 2-MODULE relay - 1 pc PRM-91H/11,PRM-92H,PRM-2H Packing of plug- in relay - 2 pc SMR-K,SMR-T,SMR-H,SMR-S, SMR-U,SMRM Packing of SMR-14 pc SOU-1,SOU-2,CRM-91HE , CRM-2HE Packing of 1-MODULE relay w ith accessories VS116K,VS116U,VS308K, VS316/24,VS316/230,USS,VS Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 12 pc CRM-81J,CRM-83J,CRM-82TO, CRM-61,CRM-9S,CRM-2H, CRM-2T,CRM-4,CRM-42, SOU-1,DIM-2,DIM-5,DIM-14, HRH-5,HRN-33,HRN-34, HRN-35,HRN-51,HRN-52, HRN-54,MR-41,MR-42,PRI-31, SJR-2,TER-3,TER-7,HRN-56, HRN-63,HRN-64,HRN-67 Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 10 pc D esign Dimensions 17.6 17.6 13.8 5 PRI-32 5 1-MODULE DESIGN 90 67.5 45 27 21 7 90 67.5 45 6.2 15.3 30 6 48 13 64 80 6 35 35 2-MODULE DESIGN 3-MODULE DESIGN 19 65 19 21 21 64 52 90 67.5 45 35.6 90 67.5 45 35 35 SOU-3 RHV-1, TEV-4 62 34 57 2 70 96 26 21 11 117 Dimensions MINI SMR-T, SMR-H, SMT-K MINI SMR-S, SMR-U R1 MINI SMR-B 13.3 R1 3 R2 3 1 13.3 49 49 12.6 49 ATR, ATF, ATC 21 DTR, DTF, DTC 89 89 56.4 54.3 28.6 84 84 28.6 PS-100-12, PS-100-24 48 48 48 48 41 4.6 4 14 10 28.2 42 9 42 42 13 10 8 5.5 4 PANEL ZSR-30, PS-30-R, ZNP-10 HRN-41, HRN-42, HRN-43,HRN-43N, PRI-41, PRI-42, COS-1, HRH-1, TER-4 PANEL PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B 9 10 10 8 19 PS-30-12, PS-30-24 PS-10-12, PS-10-24 48 17.6 11 33.9 8.5 8.5 6-MODULE DESIGN 105 90 21 19 65 42 29.5 28.2 42 14 15.3 45 7 8.8 8.8 41 118 35 14.1 Dimensions Socket for PRM-91/8 Socket for PRM-91H/ 11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H, 750 PRM-91H/11. PRM-91H/8 PRM-92H, PRM-2H 37 ES-11 ES-8 5.6 65 65 3.2 5.6 3.2 45 4 4.2 45 4.2 30 38 30 38 27 27 50 35 750L 35 13 54,4 782L 13 22 89 6,5 4,4 4,4 4,4 21,2 23 13 35,6 6,2 6,3 6,3 4,1 27,5 photosensor SKS 21.8 2,2x0,5 110 20 6x 21 HRH-6 66 4 50 14 20.8 M16x1.5 15 30 external potentiometer for CRM-2HE, CRM-91HE M16x1.5 M 22x1 28 15 15 15 110 17 27 27 20 15 27 M16x1.5 28 28 B1 B3 B2 15 119 Dimensions 43 28 29 56 46 77 84 68 107 SR051;SR101;SR151 46 SR200;SR250 6 box IP66 for TEV3 box IP66 for TEV1,2 SR300;SR400;SR600 17 25 20 110 110 110 110 M20x1.5 M16x1.5 27 27 M20x1.5 M16x1.5 27 27 50 50 66 120 M20x1.5 66 M20x1.5 Dimensions VS425 VSM425 VS440 VS463 35 VS420 VSK-20 60 44 45 85 63 35.5 62.5 55 10 45 4.4 49.4 47.5 65.4 45 85 85 53.3 45 17.5 45 85 VS120 VS220 VSM220 4.7 35.5 IKV ATV-1 45.1 8.9 53.5 Mo 61 Di 21 Mi Do 8 Fr 4 Sa So : AUTO MANU 76.5 60.3 02 MENU OK + 121 Examples of usage Multifunction time relay CRM-91H,CRM-93H - for electric appliances, where is necessary to change the exact timing - controlling of the illumination, heating, motors, machines, ventilators, contactors... N N L L A1 S A1 A2 S A2 here s lway i unct if Mult 15 16 ity a onal yw ever and 15 18 Multifunction time relay with contactless output CRM-9S - using for warning illuminatin on the road, flashers, cyclers, often switched systems ... 12 V AC 16 18 Multifunction time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE - time adjusting via external operating unit, operating on panel, switchboard doors N L A1 S A1 A2 S A2 B1 B2 B3 external operating unit CR -9S B1 18 18 Singlefunction time relay CRM-81J - time switch, using for run down the pump after switch off the heating, switching of ventilators ... N A1 S 18 Multifunction time relay CRM-61 - for electronic appliances, light control, heating, motors, fans..... L N L 16 15 A2 A1 A2 S CRM-61 16 15 122 16 18 15 18 Examples of usage Time relay plug-in type PRM-91H, PRM-92H - serves to control light signallization, heating, motor and fan control... etc. Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO - delayed back-up switch off at current failure (emergency illumination, emergency respirator) N L A2 A1 26 16 CRM-82TO FUNC e 28 18 L N 25 15 Doublestage delay unit SJR-2 - for sequential load switching, electric furnaces, heaters.... a Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H - regular rooms ventilation, cyclic humidity exhaustion, illumination controlling, circulation pump, flash, warning appliances, regular pump down, regular irrigation via electromagnetic valve N N L A1 A2 L A1 S A2 1 2 25 15 16 26 28 18 3 N Staircase switch CRM-4 - staircase automatic systems, ventilators switching, for multiplace operating illumination on the staircases and halls... L 15 16 18 Progammable staircase automat with signalling before switch off CRM-42 - starcaise illumination operation - on-coming switch off signalling (flash = comfort + safety together) L A2 A1 S S A2 A1 18 15 16 18 N 123 Examples of usage Digital time switch SHT-1/2 - for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, appliances could be controlled in regular cycles, or according to adjusted program (blocking of main door out of working hours or night) - in combination with other devices could be controlling combinated (rooms ventilation, irrigation controlling, bell at school or in church...) r you g in iday n i t hea n Fr itch . e.g. o w s o . ve . dt nee you arri u o n y re Whe ge befo p.m. a cott at 1:13 13th N L A1 18 15 16 7 Auto 0 12 6 SHT-1/2 MAN 2 OK PRG RESET + MAN 25 26 A2 ESC Programmable digital relay PDR-2 - illumination, ventilators, contactors controlling, controlling of interlocking plans, system of time abate and blocking (billiards, pin-balls....), away control via external buttons N L tion rma and um m i x a .. ed m lay.. u ne a disp o y n ed Whe you ne n the 26 25 28 18 15 ut abo .... time fo e in urat acc 16 Twilight switch SOU-1 - outdoor illumination switching (garden illumination), flash, shop-window, hall and office illumination (switch off in desired light level, controlling of intensity) N 230V L N L A1 A1 S A2 IN A1 A1 15 124 S VS425 A2 IN IN IN 16 18 15 16 18 VS425 Examples of usage Delay on star/delta CRM-2T - motor starting more than 3 kW, electronic switchover from mode start to mode operation with device CRM-2T, what assures exact timing Mini contactor VS425 - switching of the higher loads, especially in other categories than AC1 ctor nta k, co r o ger w N L A1 A2 VS425 15 25 26 16 18 VS425 an lay c e r y r xilia ou n au ll help y e h W 5 wi VS42 n no lo 28 Modular contactor VS120. VS220. VS420. VS425 - to switch circuits for supply and control of heating, lights, air-conditioning and other el. devices. Switches loads AC-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, AC-15 L N Modular contactors VS440. VS463 - to switch supply and control circuits for heating, air-conditioning and other el. devices, switching 3-phase motors Switches loads A-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, and AC-15 L N VS220-20 VS440-40 I th = 20A A1-A2 AC 230V 50/60Hz A1-A2 DC 220V ( ) A1 ( ) A2 Control. voltage I th = 40A A1-A2 AC 220-230V 50/60Hz A1-A2 DC 220-230V 2 4 20A / 1 230V 4kW / 1 230V AC3 1.3kW / 1 230V ( ) A2 4 2 7 5 3 1 ( ) A1 1 3 6 8 AC1 40A / 3 400V 26kW / 3 400V AC3 11kW / 3 400V AC1 Auxiliary plug-in relays 750. 782 - to switch bigger output (load) Digital time switch SHT-1, SHT-1/2 - for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, in daily or weekly mode N L A1 18 15 16 7 Auto 0 6 12 SHT-1/2 MAN 2 OK reset A2 26 PRG + 25 MAN ESC 28 replacement of current plug-in relays when servicing... 125 Examples of usage Staircase automat with dimming DIM-2 - step by step (fluent) dim up, adjusted time is ON and fluent dim down (e.g. possible to adjust permanent shine to min. brightness everlasting light) - block of flats (entry, halls, staircases), garden lighting Controlled dimmer DIM-5 - short press ON/OFF, long press - brightness regulation, is in memory. Other presses activate memory - switch on and dimming of hall, staircase ... N N L ore um e yo n giv a c b . bul ink al el you th m r a no than Also V A1 T2 L V A1 ergy el.en es e v a nd s sourc ble a ur light a t r o fo com ith y Feel ether w tog - T A2 T1 A2 Power relays VS - switching of higher load than is capacity of switched unit = repeater - assistant light controlling, signalling, boilers, ... Memory relay MR-41, MR-42 - because of 2-wire parallel buttons connection save money, place and time during the installation - light switching, hall, staircase, big rooms, controlling systems, automation N L L N A1 ON/OFF A2 B2 B1 A1 A3 A2 1 Un 2 L E D 22 21 11 12 24 14 11 Switching power supply PS-R - power supply of any devices and appliances via safe voltage with full galvanically separated from mains - power supply of driving systems, interlocking plants and use in measurement and control naalter , s e itch ULE of sw 1-MOD e g n o int e ra : Wid e design h s a l nd fl oub ine a t all in d h s t a a ts th d th ligh tches an l a g i Sin ing sw t - A1 A2 21 22 24 A1 A3 A2 PS-30-R L E D A12 11 31 126 32 12 34 14 Controlling and signalling units USS - compact dimensions, elegant design, wide range of use, configuration for request - switching and signalling in switchboard, controlling centre, automation... A3 N L 12 14 A11 A13 Examples of usage Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35) - monitoring of mains voltage for appliances inclinable to supply tolerance Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35) - protection of appliances against under-/overvoltage AC 230 V A1 A2 A2 A1 25 26 28 . s off 15 ay nit p u g orin r onit r highe m c i e fa as to b could b n i t e en stm mag Inve Da 16 18 Monitoring voltage relay HRN-35 - start of back-up supply in case of failure N AC230V L 16 18 Monitoring voltage relay HRN-34 - load disconnected when voltage declines or battery is discharged N A2 A1 15 L + A1 A2 4 DC AC 25 28 26 15 15 16 16 18 18 Monitoring current relay PRI-51, PRI-32 - current-limiting relay (on one branch two appliances, which never work together), controlling systems, motors, heating, current indication, controlling of 1-phase motor run down, during the installation of main housing switchboard could be controlled via eye, if the cooker is not switched - in connection with current transformers, it is possible to extend current ranges up to 600A, which makes more things possible N AC230V L A1 A2 B1 B2 16 15 18 127 Examples of usage Relay monitoring power factor COS-1 - monitors power-factor in 3-phase mains / unloading of motors, pumps, lift systems Monitoring voltage relay HRN-43 - regulation of voltage from generator, water el. plants, 3-phase control in the main - monitors and protects main´s quality trol e con t a m r ulti unde y l p up ase s 3-ph L3 L2 L1 N L3 L2 L1 N f ost o ff. C r o s y t pa highe t tha be far n e stm can Inve motor a Relay monitoring over-/undervoltage in 3-phase mains HRN-54N - monitoring voltage in switchboard, protection of appliances Relay monitoring sequence and failure of phases HRN-55, HRN-55N - monitoring of proper motor rotation, electric drive, etc. L3 L2 L1 N L3 L2 L1 N L1 N L1 N L2 L3 L2 L3 onior m ase f n lutio 3-ph ct so ices in s. a p com dev lem and nsitive“ nt prob y s a E g „se Preve torin mains. And ut? will o t n bur elay ever ?Our r r o t o hy ur m know w ou. o y Has idn´t tell y d you 16 16 18 15 15 18 Monitoring current relay PRI-41 (PRI-42) - monitoring over-/-underload (machine, motor ...) - monitoring consumption, diagnostics of distant appliance (short circuit, increased consump. ...) Monitoring voltage relay for under/vervoltage for 3-phase mains HRN-54 - confortable monitoring of 3-phase mains N L3 L2 L1 AC230V L L1 L2 L3 der 15 hase 18 -p One 128 ass g gl 16 cu t un rren ma yin gnif Examples of usage Level switch HRH-1 - monitoring level in wells, tanks, pools, etc. Level switch HRH-5 - monitoring level in well, sump, tanks, pool, silo... N N L L u e yo Hav ump ? n flow ur p over ving yo s, you r e v e e ha voir while nk?If y itch. r e s a g e t w r n s i y r you nyth mpt evel Has burnt e with e t used l e o ever operat have n to baly pro Thermostat TER-3 with external sensor - control of temperature of floor heating N ort L A2 A1 ion ulat Reg T1 T1 = ngs savi omf nd c have and ne y e mon s in o Save device two 2 stage thermostat TER-4 with 2 external sensors - control of temperature of e.g. gas/electric boiler N L sensor 1 a sensor 2 18 15 N Thermostat for thermal protection of motors TER-7 - protection of motors against thermal overload Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9 - complex control of heating and water heating in a house tor mo asic db L re A1 Befo A2 25 26 le an imp S . e ol lat too contr it is 28 N L sensor 1 A1 T1 18 15 16 T1 7 Auto T1 0 6 0 sensor 2 C 12 built-in PTC sensor 16 15 Ta R A2 18 Tb VS425 T2 T2 26 25 28 will hich r the w t osta d fo erm vice an h t r de ? la simi in one ion one a s ct ow n u kn functio gle-fun o y Do you 6 of sin rs ce offe pri 129 Note 130 Enjoy the complete household eq uipment b y ELKO EP V SM S M -22 2200 Contactorw ith optionalm anual sw itching (e.g. atboiler) D IM IM -15 D im m ing ofenergy saving lights and LED lam ps SM R -U SO U -3 D im m ing ofspotlights TEVV -1 TE Function oflightsw itch forpulling dow n the shutters ata high lum inous intensity Tw o-leveltherm ostatw ith independentsetting ofupperand low ertem perature PR II-32 TERR -9 TE Centralm onitoring ofthe current is there a lam p sw itched on w ithoutany reason? W atertem perature control according to 2 tem peratures PSBB -10 PS 0 -1 12 Idealforsupplying drives,m otors, lightsources SM R -B Ventilation ofthe room after turning o the button SM R -M D im m ing ofLED bulbs and dim m able saving lightbulbs C R M -91 91HH SM R -T M ultifunctionalrelay featuring 10 m ostfrequently used functions D elayed sw itch-o ofroom lighting, exhausting the bathroom s CO SS -1 H R N -33 M onitoring the m otor overloading and balancing M onitoring the voltage atthe devices susceptible to pow er supply tolerance U SS SS M R -4 42 Versatile and signalling m odules D o ityourself Controloflighting from m ultiple locations,stepping relay. SH TT-1 Real-tim e-based sw itching ofelectricalequipm entand appliances C R M -4 Staircase sw itch to controlthe entrance lights D IM IM -2 Staircase autom atic sw itch w ith adjustable sm ooth run-up and run-dow n oflight LICC -1 LI Autom atically regulates the intensity oflightin a room TERR -3A TE C R M -2H Therm ostat for tem perature m onitoring and regulation (forthaw ing the black ice) Ensures circulation ofw aterat regularintervals , 1x per1 hourfor5 m inutes Z TR TR -15-1 12 H R H -4 Forpow ering the doorbells, videophones,doorlocks The levelsystem consists ofH RH -5 and contactors VS425 PS -3 300 -12 TEVV -4 TE Pow ersource intrusion, re,and Tem perature m onitoring in outdoorand heavy-duty locations (IP 65) SO U -2 Autom atic sw itching-on ofthe outdoor lighting attw ilightw ith integrated tim erfor blocking the functions H R H -5 Levelsw itch -pum ping w aterfrom the tank Industrial use of ELKO EP products M R -42 G roup controloflighting from m ultiple locations H R F-10 SO U -2 M onitors the value of the alternating voltage frequency Autom atic sw itching-on ofthe outdoorlighting attw ilight C R M -81J Periodic ventilation PR I-53 Intended to m onitorthe current in 3 phases PR I-41/42 M onitoring the m axim um perm issible w eight C R M -2T Starting the m otor,w ye-delta H R N -55 SO U -1 Phase failure m onitoring Autom atic sw itching-on ofthe outdoorlighting attw ilight H R N -41 SH T-4 PR I-51 M onitoring the voltage level Indication ofm achine failure / operation,depending on the ow ing current Used forcontrolling the lighting w ith no lightsensors required V S425 C R M -2H 3-phase contactor fortriggering the m otor TER -3 M onitoring tem perature in a tank H R N -37 Lubricantdispensing C R M -91H Voltage / low voltage m onitoring Pulse shift H R N -64 PR I-51 O bserving the standby pow er unitbattery TER -9 Checking forconveyorjam m ing = currentincrease Liquid tem perature controlof tw o independentcircuits CO S-1 Pow erfactorm onitoring = overallprotection ofm otors U SS-m o d u l C R M .91H PS-R D osing m aterialatpreset intervals Pow ersupply atstabilised voltage Lucid sw itching and signalling, m odulardesign,w ide range ofcom binations H R N -43 H R N -54 Assuring ofcontinuous energy supply. Back-up supply sw itching Checking forovervoltage atsensitive m achinery circuits H R H -5 O bserving the liquid level SH T-1/2 Pre-heating the devices at presettim es Support of project design Our aim is to give a complete care to all electro project designers. Our activities: Our products are a part of the following programs: Project programs Award programs VeroX Obis DTB ELKO EP XLS XLS elektrotechnika MARKS AND SYMBOLS DWG TRAINING In case our products attracted your interest, do not hesitate to contact us at [email protected] or see our websites www.elkoep.com for more information. TECHNICAL SUPPORT In case of any questions regarding use of our products for a particular project, contact us at [email protected] Note.: logos, names, software, hardware are protected by owner’s rights. 133 Production technology The base of the production is a modern line disposing of SMD technology. SMD components compose of more than 80 % of all components. In the year 2004 the production line was modernized distinctly and it was completed by some new machines. Herewith the accurancy improved considerably and the capacity enhanced. 1) Printed circuit boards are placed into a cartridge and then automatically delivered to SMD production line. 134 2) Fully automatic adhesive and flux printer distributes adhesive or flux through profile form to the place where the SMD components are then mounted. Part of this process is also 3D optic inspection of the executed operation. 3) 4) SMD components are mounted by pick-up machines. Three heads with laser alignment can place up to 15,000 components an hour. This machine replaces approximately 100 workers. PCBs with mounted SMD components are inspected and forwarded to reflow. 5) 6) Hot-air furnace ERSA serves for glue hardening or to activation of soldering flux by re-melting. The furnace has 3 zones. temperature after curing on 3rd ) output) zone approx. 1400C. For flux re-melting , the starting temperature is 130 0C, middle 180 0C and output is 280 0C. Fully automatic line is ended by a cartridge which distributes picked and cured PCBs into holders. Production technology 7) After the classic components are manually mounted by experienced workers. 8) Manual placing of classical components is followed by soldering in soldering unit SEHO 8135-PCS which already supports “lead free” soldering technology. Thanks to IR pre-heating, this soldering unit allows operations on PCB together with temperature sensitive components on the upper side of PCB. Soldering unit is equipped by LW soldering jet and Delta jet. These jets allow a good quality. 9) 10) After necessary semi-product testing on pin-testers (Pic.9) final assembling into enclosures is executed. The actual state of completion is monitored by bar codes during the whole production process (Pic.10). 11) Semi-finished PCBs are tested by this tester. It replaces visual control. By using weight board, particular pins on bottom part are in contact. Functionality of SMD components and classical components is checked. Testing one PCB set takes about 20 s. 12) In the end the products are fully printed by laser technology. Laser can burn from upper part) side of the product) and side part (front panel and terminals) printing one piece takes about 30 s. 135 EL LKO EP R Ru uss ssia ia a ELKO EL KO O EP Po ola land nd ELKO EL KO OE EP P Ukkra rain ine e ELKO EL KO EP EL LKO EP P Ge Germ rman any y EL LKO KO EP Sl Slov ovak ov akia ak ia ELKO EL KO EP Hu H ngary y iNEL iN ELS S As Asia ia (Ch hin na) a ELKO EP, s.r.o. Palackeho 493 / 769 01 Holesov, Vsetuly / Czech Republic tel.: +420 573 514 221 | fax: +420 573 514 227 | [email protected] | www.elkoep.com Published: 09/2013 / Modifications or amendments reserved/ © Copyright ELKO EP, s.r.o. / 1st edition
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021